戒的解说注释巴利
1. Sīlaniddesavaṇṇanā
戒的本质等论述的注释巴利
Sīlasarūpādikathāvaṇṇanā
6 “如是”,就是按前面所说的那种方式。“摄持众多功德”,是指摄持增上戒学等,以及其它众多功德。“以戒定慧为门”,是说并不像“一切行无常”等那样只以观智等为门而简略地宣说,而是以戒定慧为门来宣说;或者说,因为三十七菩提分法都包含在《清净道论》里面,所以在那里面是以戒定慧为门、为重点来宣说的。由此应当知道,在戒定慧当中,其余菩提分法从自性和资助两方面都已包含在内,这个道理已经说明。由于没有从自性分别等方面加以阐明,所以就成了过于简略的说法。“不”,就是不圆满、不充分。“一切”,是指对那些不喜欢过于简略或过于详尽的人,或者对那些要通过广分别才能了知义理的人。因为简略的说法只对喜欢简略的人和顿悟者有益,对其余的人则不然。这部《清净道论》。“问”,是询问的意思;作用、造作、业,问就是一种业,所以叫问业,即询问的加行。巴利
6.Evanti vuttappakārena. Anekaguṇasaṅgāhakenāti adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ, aññesañca anekesaṃ guṇānaṃ saṅgāhakena. Sīlasamādhipaññāmukhenāti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 277; theragā. 676; netti. 5) viya vipassanāmattādimukhena saṅkhepato adesetvā sīlasamādhipaññāmukhena desitopi, sattatiṃsāyapi vā bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ visuddhimaggantogadhattā tattha sīlasamādhipaññā mukhaṃ pamukhaṃ katvā desitopi. Etena sīlasamādhipaññāsu avasesabodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ sabhāvato, upakārato ca antogadhabhāvo dīpitoti veditabbaṃ. Atisaṅkhepadesitoyeva hoti sabhāvavibhāgādito avibhāvitattā. Nālanti na pariyattaṃ na samatthaṃ. Sabbesanti nātisaṅkhepanātivitthārarucīnampi, vipañcitaññuneyyānampi vā. Saṅkhepadesanā hi saṃkhittarucīnaṃ, ugghaṭitaññūnaṃyeva ca upakārāya hoti, na panitaresaṃ. Assa visuddhimaggassa. Pucchanaṭṭhena pañhā, kiriyā karaṇaṃ kammaṃ, pañhāva kammaṃ pañhākammaṃ, pucchanapayogo.
“什么是戒?”这是直接问它的自性。“以什么含义称为戒?”意思是:称为“戒”的这个词,是依据什么所诠对象而发生的?“戒”这个东西,应当从自性、作用、现起方式、近因这几个方面来了知,所以经文说“它的相、作用、现起、近因是什么?”所谓修行实践,只有在看到利益时才会发生,所以说“有什么利益?”“有几种?”这是问它的分类。因为对于具有分类的事物来说,自性的阐明正是通过展示分类才得以完成。“净”就是清净,也就是从杂染污垢中解脱出来。想要获得这种清净的人,因为需要具备方法上的善巧,就应当知道杂染如同缺乏方法善巧一样,所以说“它的杂染是什么?”巴利
Kiṃ sīlanti sarūpapucchā. Kenaṭṭhena sīlanti kena atthena sīlanti vuccati, ‘‘sīla’’nti padaṃ kaṃ abhidheyyaṃ nissāya pavattanti attho. Tayidaṃ sīlaṃ sabhāvato, kiccato, upaṭṭhānākārato, āsannakāraṇato ca kathaṃ jānitabbanti āha ‘‘kānassa lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānī’’ti. Paṭipatti nāma diṭṭhānisaṃse eva hotīti āha ‘‘kimānisaṃsa’’nti. Katividhanti pabhedapucchā. Vibhāgavantānaṃ hi sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgadassanamukheneva hotīti. Vodānaṃ visuddhi. Sā ca saṃkilesamalavimutti. Taṃ icchantena yasmā upāyakosallatthinā anupāyakosallaṃ viya saṃkileso jānitabboti āha ‘‘ko cassa saṃkileso’’ti.
这里说的“于此”,是指在那件事上,或者指对那个问题的处理。“解答”就是揭示、说明。因为被问到的意义如果没有被阐明,就会像藏在拳头里一样隐而不显。把它揭示出来就是解答,因为它使意义变得明显。“从杀生等”中,“生”从世俗说法看是指有情,从究竟意义看是指命根。它的本性就是会死亡,在寿命尚未尽时令其过早死亡就是“杀”,意思是:不给它慢慢死去的机会,而是让它迅速死亡;或者以刀等器具越过、制服而令其死亡,就是“杀”,也就是杀害有情。“等”这个字包括了不与取等等。从杀生等这些恶戒行为。“远离”是指通过受持远离和遇境远离而停止。“行持仪轨”是指执行依止师等仪轨。“思等法”是为了用经文的方式把简要说的意义分开显示出来,所以说了“确实曾这样说”等等。其中,“思”就是思,意思是与自身相应的心法一起朝向所缘。实际上,正是因为随顺思,那些与思相应的心法才在所缘中运作。思虽然通于善等三性,但这里指的是戒思,所以应当知道是“善”。“属于心者”就是心所,意思是与心相应。虽然思本身也是心所,但因为单独把“思为戒”提出来,所以应当知道除此之外的远离、无贪等心所也是戒,就像公牛与阉牛的比喻一样。“防护”就是约束,就像关上门,使不善法不能进入心中。“不违犯”是与违犯相对,依不违犯而生起的心和心所。其中,“思名为戒”等等,是对前面所说的经文语句的解释。“远离者的思”是指与远离相应、起主要作用的思。“圆满者的思”是指推动行持仪轨的思。“远离者的远离”是就远离起主要作用而说的。巴利
Tatrāti tasmiṃ, tassa vā pañhākammassa. Vissajjananti vivaraṇaṃ. Pucchito hi attho avibhāvitattā nigūḷho muṭṭhiyaṃ kato viya tiṭṭhati. Tassa vivaraṇaṃ vissajjanaṃ vibhūtabhāvakāraṇato. Pāṇātipātādīhīti ettha pāṇoti vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tassa saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antare eva ativa pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho, atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇaghāto. Ādisaddena adinnādānādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tehi pāṇātipātādīhi dussīlyakammehi. Viramantassāti samādānavirativasena, sampattavirativasena ca oramantassa. Vattapaṭipattinti upajjhāyavattādivattakaraṇaṃ. Cetanādayo dhammāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ pāḷivasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha cetayatīti cetanā, attanā sampayuttadhammehi saddhiṃ ārammaṇe abhisandahatīti attho. Cetanāya anukūlavaseneva hi taṃsampayuttā dhammā ārammaṇe pavattanti. Cetanā kāmaṃ kusalattikasādhāraṇā, idha pana sīlacetanā adhippetāti katvā ‘‘kusalā’’ti veditabbā. Cetasi niyuttaṃ cetasikaṃ, cittasampayuttanti attho. Cetanāya satipi cetasikatte ‘‘cetanā sīla’’nti visuṃ gahitattā tadaññameva viratianabhijjhādikaṃ cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ gobalībaddañāyena. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro. Yathā akusalā dhammā citte na otaranti, tathā pidahanaṃ. Avītikkamo vītikkamassa paṭipakkhabhūtā avītikkamavasena pavattacittacetasikā. Tattha cetanā sīlaṃ nāmātiādi yathāvuttassa suttapadassa vivaraṇaṃ. Viramantassa cetanāti viratisampayuttaṃ padhānabhūtaṃ cetanamāha. Pūrentassa cetanāti vattapaṭipattiāyūhinī. Viramantassa viratīti viratiyā padhānabhāvaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ.
在这里,当依据“诸比丘,三种身思是善身业”等说法(《论事》539),与杀生等相反的、以远离为特征的思如此生起,并以主要力量完成对杀生等的远离时,与它相应的远离、无贪等,或者是属于思这一边的,或者是不起作用的——针对这个意思,才说了“思戒”。但是,当一个人对杀生等心生退缩,以远离它们的方式生起、以思为特征的远离,以及无贪等,在各方面以主要力量完成作用时,与它们相应的思,或者是属于远离等这一边的,或者是不起作用的——针对这个意思,才说了“心所戒”。巴利
Ettha hi yadā ‘‘tividhā, bhikkhave, kāyasañcetanā kusalaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādi (kathā. 539) vacanato pāṇātipātādīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtā tabbirativisiṭṭhā cetanā tathāpavattā padhānabhāvena pāṇātipātādipaṭiviratisādhikā hoti, tadā taṃsampayuttā viratianabhijjhādayo ca cetanāpakkhikā vā, abbohārikā vāti imamatthaṃ sandhāya cetanāsīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadā pana pāṇātipātādīhi saṅkocaṃ āpajjantassa tato viramaṇākārena pavattamānā cetanāvisiṭṭhā virati, anabhijjhādayo ca tattha tattha padhānabhāvena kiccasādhikā honti, tadā taṃsampayuttā cetanā viratiādipakkhikā vā hoti, abbohārikā vāti imamatthaṃ sandhāya cetasikasīlaṃ vuttaṃ.
现在,为了按照经中所述的方式,以善业道来分别说明思戒和心所戒,所以说了“再者”等这些话。“正在舍弃的人”:是指通过受持“从今以后我不再做”来舍弃,即使对已经现前的事情也不违犯。七种业道思:是指依次能成就舍断杀生等的七种善业道思。由于因贪欲等而做出邪淫等行为,能舍断它们的是无贪等,所以说“名为心所戒的是无贪……乃至……正见等法”。就像因为贪欲和嗔恚而做出邪行、杀生等,同样,因为邪见也会为了见儿子面容等目的而做出这些。而能舍断它们的是无贪等。巴帝摩卡防护是指摄属于律藏、区分应行与应禁的学处戒。念防护是对意根和前五根这六根的守护,这守护就是如此生起的念本身。智防护是慧。忍防护是安忍,那是以无嗔为主的、如此生起的诸蕴,或者就是无嗔本身。精进防护是为了去除欲寻等而生起的精进。关于巴帝摩卡防护、念防护等中应当说明的内容,后面会清楚阐明。巴利
Idāni sutte āgatanayena kusalakammapathavasena cetanācetasikasīlāni vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pajahantassāti samādānavasena ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya na karissāmī’’ti sampattavatthukānipi anajjhācaraṇena pajahantassa. Satta kammapathacetanāti pāṇātipātādipahānasādhikā paṭipāṭiyā satta kusalakammapathacetanā. Abhijjhādivasena yaṃ paradāragamanādi karīyati, tassa pahāyakā anabhijjhādayo sīlanti āha ‘‘cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma anabhijjhā…pe… sammādiṭṭhidhammā’’ti. Yathā hi abhijjhābyāpādavasena micchācārapāṇātipātādayo karīyanti, evaṃ micchādiṭṭhivasenāpi te puttamukhadassanādiatthaṃ karīyanti. Tesañca pajahanakā anabhijjhādayoti. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro cārittavārittavibhāgaṃ vinayapariyāpannaṃ sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Satisaṃvaro manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ ārakkhā, sā ca tathāpavattā satiyeva. Ñāṇasaṃvaro paññā. Khantisaṃvaro adhivāsanā, sā ca tathāpavattā adosapadhānā khandhā, adoso eva vā. Vīriyasaṃvaro kāmavitakkādīnaṃ vinodanavasena pavattaṃ vīriyaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasatisaṃvarādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
所谓“诸流”,就是渴爱、邪见、无明、恶行以及残余烦恼这些流。说了“我说对诸流的防护”之后,又通过“这些以慧被关闭”这句话,可以知道:对诸流的防护、关闭和彻底断除,就是慧。巴利
Sotānīti taṇhādiṭṭhiavijjāduccaritaavasiṭṭhakilesasotāni. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘paññāyete pidhiyyare’’ti vacanena sotānaṃ saṃvaro pidahanaṃ samucchedanaṃ ñāṇanti viññāyati.
把这件事当作目标来作意之后,以那种智如理地反复观察,然后才受用资具。这种资具的受用,也因为本质是智,所以就在这里归入智律仪之中。能忍、能接受,就是堪忍。已生起,就是在各种所缘中已经生起、已经产生。欲寻,就是和欲相应的寻。不接受,就是不让它进入心里安住。活命遍净,就是舍弃佛陀所呵斥的邪命,以无可指责的方式寻求资具而成就的活命遍净戒,这也在这里归入精进律仪之中,因为精进是成就它的因素。在这里应当知道:就像智因为阻止渴爱等流的生起,以关闭、遮止之义而成为律仪,又因为它是后来生起的种种功德的依处等,以戒之义而成为戒;同样,忍因为不忍受,以安忍来防护会生起的烦恼,所以是律仪,又因为它是依靠堪忍之因而生起的种种功德的依处等,以戒之义而成为戒;精进因为去除应当去除的恶法,以去除来防护,所以是律仪,又因为它是依靠去除之因而生起的种种功德的依处等,以戒之义而成为戒。然而,就像巴帝摩卡戒等以不给那些恶法生起机会的方式来防护、关闭,依此而称为律仪;同样,没有受戒的人从事相上远离,也是如此,所以说“凡诸畏恶者……应知为律仪戒”。不以此违犯,所以是不违犯。这样,善心便生起。巴利
Idamatthikataṃ manasi katvā yena ñāṇena yoniso paccavekkhitvā paccayā paṭisevīyanti. Taṃ paccayapaṭisevanampi ñāṇasabhāvattā ettheva ñāṇasaṃvare eva samodhānaṃ saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Khamati adhivāsetīti khamo. Uppannanti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe jātaṃ nibbattaṃ. Kāmavitakkanti kāmūpasaṃhitaṃ vitakkaṃ. Nādhivāsetīti cittaṃ āropetvā abbhantare na vāseti. Ājīvapārisuddhipīti buddhapaṭikuṭṭhaṃ micchājīvaṃ pahāya anavajjena paccayapariyesanena sijjhanakaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlampi ettheva vīriyasaṃvare eva samodhānaṃ gacchati vīriyasādhanattā. Ettha ca yathā ñāṇaṃ taṇhādisotānaṃ pavattinivāraṇato pidahanaṭṭhena saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro ca, parato pavattanakaguṇānaṃ ādhārādibhāvato sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ , evaṃ khanti anadhivāsanena uppajjanakakilesānaṃ adhivāsanena saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro ca, khamanahetu uppajjanakaguṇānaṃ ādhārādibhāvato sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ, vīriyaṃ vinodetabbānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ vinodanena saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro ca, vinodanahetu uppajjanakaguṇānaṃ ādhārādibhāvato sīlanaṭṭhena sīlanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā pana pātimokkhasīlādi tassa tassa pāpadhammassa pavattituṃ appadānavasena saṃvaraṇaṃ pidahanaṃ, taṃ upādāya saṃvaro, evaṃ asamādinnasīlassa āgatavatthuto viramaṇampīti āha ‘‘yā ca pāpabhīrukānaṃ…pe… saṃvarasīlanti veditabba’’nti. Na vītikkamati etenāti avītikkamo. Tathāpavatto kusalacittuppādo.
7 在其余的问题中,安立就是妥善安置。因为由恶戒所驱动的身业等,在现在和未来都会带来不利和痛苦,没有妥善安置,所以就叫未安置、散乱、流散;而由善戒所驱动的则相反,叫已安置、不散乱、不流散,就像垂目、不摆动手臂等那样。因此说“身业等因善戒而不散乱,这就是其含义”。以此从定的作用来区分戒。因为定的安立是令相应法不散乱的因。这是身业等的安置、约束。执持就是依止、根本性。因为它确实被称为初行等。以此从地界的作用来区分戒。地界以持俱生色的方式而运作。而这则是以作为无过失法的根本依止。因此说“诸善法”等。其中,善法是指连同前分的广大法及无上法。其他老师则说。头义:如同头被砍断时,整个身体都毁灭,同样,戒被破坏时,一切功德体都毁灭。因此,戒的意义是最上支的意义。其意趣是:应说“头”或“首”,而依词源论的方法说为“戒”。清凉义就是平息热恼之义。以此显示:去掉‘ta’音,依词源论的方法而说为“戒”。确实,如此由修行成就的此戒,能平息一切烦恼的热恼。以如是等:以“等”字,应知摄集了“诸不善法在此戒存在时不得进入,故为戒”,或“或者因恶行之精进被其击垮而安睡,故名为戒”,或“一切善法得以进入的适切厅堂,故为戒”等义。巴利
7.Avasesesu pana pañhesu. Samādhānaṃ saṇṭhapanaṃ. Dussīlyavasena hi pavattā kāyakammādayo sampati, āyatiñca ahitadukkhāvahā, na sammā ṭhapitāti asaṇṭhapitā vippakiṇṇā visaṭā ca nāma honti, susīlyavasena pana pavattā tabbipariyāyato saṇṭhapitā avippakiṇṇā avisaṭā ca nāma honti yathā taṃ okkhittacakkhutā abāhuppacālanādi. Tenāha ‘‘kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena avippakiṇṇatāti attho’’ti. Etena samādhikiccato sīlanaṃ viseseti. Tassa hi samādhānaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ avikkhepahetutā. Idaṃ kāyakammādīnaṃ saṇṭhapanaṃ saṃyamanaṃ. Upadhāraṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ mūlabhāvo. Tathā hissa ādicaraṇādibhāvo vutto. Tena pathavīdhātukiccato sīlanaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Sā hi sahajātarūpadhammānaṃ sandhāraṇavasena pavattati. Idaṃ pana anavajjadhammānaṃ mūlādhiṭṭhānabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘kusalānaṃ dhammāna’’ntiādi. Tattha kusaladhammā nāma sapubbabhāgā mahaggatānuttarā dhammā. Aññe pana ācariyā. Siraṭṭhoti yathā sirasi chinne sabbo attabhāvo vinassati, evaṃ sīle bhinne sabbaṃ guṇasarīraṃ vinassati. Tasmā tassa uttamaṅgaṭṭho sīlaṭṭho. ‘‘Siro sīsa’’nti vā vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘sīla’’nti vuttanti adhippāyo. Sītalaṭṭho pariḷāhavūpasamanaṭṭho. Tena ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā niruttinayeneva ‘‘sīla’’nti vuttanti dasseti. Tathā hidaṃ payogasampāditaṃ sabbakilesapariḷāhavūpasamakaraṃ hoti. Evamādināti ādi-saddena sayanti akusalā etasmiṃ sati apaviṭṭhā hontīti sīlaṃ, supanti vā tena vihatussāhāni sabbaduccaritānīti sīlaṃ, sabbesaṃ vā kusaladhammānaṃ pavesārahasālāti sīlanti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
8 “以培育之义为戒”这个说法,虽然先前已经通过词义分析加以说明了,但它仍然只是本质义,所以说“培育是它的特相”。因为对于那分成思等不同种类的戒来说,除了这个特相之外,再没有别的意义能够毫无遗漏地统摄它,可以被说成是特相。难道不能有统摄多种差别的共相,而不是别相吗?针对这个问难,说“如同色的有可见性,虽然色分为青黄等多种差别”。巴利
8. ‘‘Sīlanaṭṭhena sīla’’nti pubbe saddatthuddhārena pakāsitopi bhāvattho evāti āha ‘‘sīlanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ tassā’’ti. Na hi tassa cetanādibhedabhinnassa anavasesato saṅgāhako tato añño attho atthi, yo lakkhaṇabhāvena vucceyya. Nanu ca anekabhedasaṅgāhakaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ nāma siyā, na visesalakkhaṇanti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘sanidassanattaṃ rūpassa, yathā bhinnassanekadhā’’ti.
就像青色等差别使色处分成许多不同种类,但“可见性”仍然是它区别于其他法的独特特征。它不像无常等那样是共相,也不像变坏那样是共相,这里也应该这样理解。那么,这个“可见性”到底是什么呢?就是可以被看见,也就是成为眼识的对象。虽然它不离色处,但为了把色处和其他法区分开来,就把它当作另一种东西,说它是“与见俱有”。因为在以法自身的共性而成为一体的诸法中,那种能造成差别的自性,适合被当作另一种东西来施设,这样才能让人理解意义上的差别。或者,在“与见俱有”这句话里,“俱”这个词是表示“具有那种状态”的意思,就像“与喜贪俱行”中的用法一样。巴利
Yathā hi nīlādivasena anekabhedabhinnassāpi rūpāyatanassa sanidassanattaṃ visesalakkhaṇaṃ tadaññadhammāsādhāraṇato. Na aniccatādi viya, ruppanaṃ viya vā sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiṃ panetaṃ sanidassanattaṃ nāma? Daṭṭhabbatā cakkhuviññāṇassa gocarabhāvo. Tassa pana rūpāyatanato anaññattepi aññehi dhammehi rūpāyatanaṃ visesetuṃ aññaṃ viya katvā saha nidassanena sanidassananti vuccati. Dhammasabhāvasāmaññena hi ekībhūtesu dhammesu yo nānattakaro sabhāvo, so aññaṃ viya katvā upacarituṃ yutto. Evaṃ hi atthavisesāvabodho hotīti. Atha vā ‘‘saha nidassanenā’’ti ettha tabbhāvattho saha-saddo yathā nandirāgasahagatāti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 14; paṭi. ma. 2.30).
“破坏恶行”是它的作用,指的是消除以身不律仪等种种形式出现的恶行。“无过失”是它的作用,指的是以无可指责的方式成就,或者以与过失相反的方式成就。在“相、作用等”中,当解说相、作用等时,所说的“作用”就是指功能或成就,而不是指味处等意义上的味。不过有些人说,“唯是功能”这个限定是为了表明它比其他作用更强,那只是他们自己的看法,因为这里要表达的意思正是:作用就是功能,或者就是成就。巴利
Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasanti kāyikaasaṃvarādibhedassa dussīlyassa vidhamanakiccaṃ. Anavajjarasanti agārayhasampattikaṃ agarahitabbabhāvena sampajjanakaṃ, avajjapaṭipakkhabhāvena vā sampajjanakaṃ. Lakkhaṇādīsūti lakkhaṇarasādīsu vuccamānesu kiccameva, sampatti vā rasoti vuccati, na rasāyatanarasādīti adhippāyo. Keci pana ‘‘kiccamevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ tassa itararasato balavabhāvadassanatthanti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ, kiccameva, sampatti eva vā rasoti imassa atthassa adhippetattā.
“以清净为现起”,是指通过身体等方面的清净状态而现起。“执取的状态”,是指应当被把握的状态。因此,从“现起的行相”这个意义上说为“现起”;若从“果”的意义来说,则是“以无悔为现起”,或者“以定为现起”。因为戒在当下就使无悔现起,辗转则使定现起。不过,由于这个果报的利益将在“利益论”中说到,所以此处应理解为没有采纳(果报之义)。有些人说,此处不采纳是因为不期望果报,这并不合理,因为果报有多种多样,而且世间戒等也被分别解说。正如接下来会说“依所依与无所依”等。就像地界以业等为远因,其余三界为近因;又像布以织工、织机、纬线、梭等为远因,纬线为近因;同样,戒以听闻正法等为远因,惭与愧是它的近因。为了说明这一点,所以说“然而惭与愧”等。“在惭与愧中”等,是成立它们为近因的论证。其中应知:以受持而生起,以不违犯而住立。巴利
Soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānanti kāyādīhi sucibhāvena paccupaṭṭhāti. Gahaṇabhāvanti gahetabbabhāvaṃ. Tena upaṭṭhānākāraṭṭhena paccupaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ, phalaṭṭhena pana avippaṭisārapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, samādhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Sīlaṃ hi sampatiyeva avippaṭisāraṃ paccupaṭṭhāpeti, paramparāya samādhiṃ. Imassa pana ānisaṃsaphalassa ānisaṃsakathāyaṃ vakkhamānattā idha aggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Keci pana phalassa anicchitattā idha aggahaṇanti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ phalassa anekavidhattā, lokiyādisīlassāpi vibhajiyamānattā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nissitānissitavasenā’’tiādi (visuddhi. 1.10). Yathā pathavīdhātuyā kammādi dūrakāraṇaṃ, sesabhūtattayaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ, yathā ca vatthassa tantavāyaturivemasalākādi dūrakāraṇaṃ, tantavo āsannakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ sīlassa saddhammassavanādi dūrakāraṇaṃ, hiriottappamassa āsannakāraṇanti dassento āha ‘‘hirottappañca panā’’tiādi. Hirottappe hītiādi tassa āsannakāraṇabhāvasādhanaṃ. Tattha uppajjati samādānavasena, tiṭṭhati avītikkamavasenāti veditabbaṃ.
戒的利益论述的注释巴利
Sīlānisaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā
9 “无悔等”中,与追悔相反的善心生起,就是无悔。应当知道,它尤其是通过观察自己的戒而生起的:“我确实有收获,我确实得到善利,我的戒如此清净。”由“等”这个字,含摄了喜悦、财富成就、称誉之声等。“以无悔为目的”是指以无悔为用途。“善的”是指没有过失的。“以无悔为利益”是指以无悔为果报。由此说明:无悔只是戒的果报,就像茂盛树木的树荫和花朵;而要通过它来成就的定等功德,则是另外一回事。巴利
9.Avippaṭisārādīti ettha vippaṭisārapaṭipakkho kusalacittuppādo avippaṭisāro. So pana visesato ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me, yassa me suparisuddhaṃ sīla’’nti attano sīlassa paccavekkhaṇavasena pavattoti veditabbo. Ādi-saddena pāmojjabhogasampattikittisaddādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Avippaṭisāratthānīti avippaṭisārappayojanāni. Kusalānīti anavajjāni. Avippaṭisārānisaṃsānīti avippaṭisāruddayāni. Etena avippaṭisāro nāma sīlassa uddayamattaṃ, saṃvaḍḍhitassa rukkhassa chāyāpupphasadisaṃ. Añño eva panānena nipphādetabbo samādhiādiguṇoti dasseti.
具戒者的戒成就,是指把戒修得清净圆满,由成就这样的戒而成为具戒者,也就是靠这戒的成就。以不放逸为因,就是以不放逸作为原因。财富蕴,就是财富的聚集。善名声远扬,是说“这人具戒,这人有善法”这样的美誉赞叹声传出来,遍满世间。无畏,是看不到自己身上有什么该受责备、该被呵斥的地方,所以没有怯惧,没有恐怖。不羞愧,就是不露怯。不迷昧,是因为没有追悔——不会想“我竟然没做善事”等等——而且那时只有善业等现前,不迷昧、以净信心而命终。身坏,就是舍弃所执蕴、命根断绝。死后,就是从死殁之后。善趣,就是美好的趣向,由此也摄取了人趣。天界,就是天趣。那因为对色等境界善加最上,所以是天界,在这里,殊胜的福果在此被受用,故也称为世间。巴利
Sīlavato sīlasampadāyāti parisuddhaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā sīlassa sampādanena sīlavato, tāya eva sīlasampadāya. Appamādādhikaraṇanti appamādakāraṇā. Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ. Kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatīti ‘‘itipi sīlavā, itipi kalyāṇadhammo’’ti sundaro thutighoso uṭṭhahati, lokaṃ pattharati. Visāradoti attani kiñci garahitabbaṃ upavaditabbaṃ apassanto vigatasārajjo nibbhayo. Amaṅkubhūtoti avilakkho. Asammūḷhoti ‘‘akataṃ vata me kalyāṇa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 3.248) vippaṭisārābhāvato, kusalakammādīnaṃyeva ca tadā upaṭṭhānato amūḷho pasannamānaso eva kālaṃkaroti. Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā, jīvitindriyassa upacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cutito uddhaṃ. Sugatinti sundaraṃ gatiṃ. Tena manussagatipi saṅgayhati. Sagganti devagatiṃ. Sā hi rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo, lokiyati ettha uḷāraṃ puññaphalanti lokoti ca vuccati.
若欲就是如果希望。且为可爱者的意思是:应当被人喜爱,应当用喜爱的眼光来看待,应当让人心生爱念。可意者是指能让同梵行者心生欢喜,或者说能被他们的心所接纳,也就是应当以慈心遍满。受尊重者是指应当被尊崇,像石伞一样。应修习者是指应当被这样敬重:这位尊者确实知所应知,见所应见。于戒中为圆满行者是指于四遍净戒中圆满而行,没有缺减,具足圆满的行相。以等之法,这里摄取了《戒赞经》中内勤心止,不舍禅那,具足观,增长空寂之处等十七种戒利益。巴利
Ākaṅkheyya ceti yadi iccheyya. Piyo ca assanti piyāyitabbo piyacakkhūhi passitabbo pemaniyo bhaveyyanti attho. Manāpoti sabrahmacārīnaṃ manavaḍḍhanako, tesaṃ vā manena pattabbo, mettacittena pharitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Garūti garuṭṭhāniyo pāsāṇachattasadiso. Bhāvanīyoti ‘‘addhā ayamāyasmā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passatī’’ti sambhāvanīyo. Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti catupārisuddhisīlesu eva paripūrakārī assa, anūnakārī paripūraṇākārena samannāgato bhaveyya. ‘‘Ādinā nayenā’’ti etena ‘‘ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.65) evamādike sīlathomanasuttāgate sattarasa sīlānisaṃse saṅgaṇhāti.
现在,不只是这些“无悔”等功德,还有其他许多戒的功德存在。为了说明这些,就开始了“再者”等这一段。其中,“于教法中”是指在能带来一切世间和出世间功德的导师教法中。对于有正行的善家子弟来说,没有戒就没有立足处、没有安住处;具有如此大威力的戒,它的功德界限和数量,谁能说、谁能说得尽呢?这就是这段话的意思。通过这一点,说明了一切世间和出世间的功德都以戒为根本。接着,为了说明通过净化污秽、平息热恼、散发清净芳香、成为生天和证涅槃的途径、成就庄严装饰、消除怖畏、产生名声和喜悦,没有任何别的东西能像戒一样给众生带来利益和安乐,于是说了“非恒河”等偈颂。巴利
Idāni na kevalamime eva avippaṭisārādayo, atha kho aññepi bahū sīlānisaṃsā vijjantīti te dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sāsaneti imasmiṃ sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇāvahe satthusāsane. Ācārakulaputtānaṃ yaṃ sīlaṃ vinā patiṭṭhā avaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, tassa evaṃ mahānubhāvassa sīlassa ānisaṃsānaṃ paricchedaṃ parimāṇaṃ ko vade ko vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyāti attho. Etena sabbesaṃyeva lokiyalokuttarānaṃ guṇānaṃ sīlameva mūlabhūtanti dassetvā tato parampi malavisodhanena, pariḷāhavūpasamanena, sucigandhavāyanena, sagganibbānādhigamūpāyabhāvena, sobhālaṅkārasādhanatāya bhayavidhamanena, kittipāmojjajanena ca sīlasadisaṃ aññaṃ sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahaṃ natthīti dassento ‘‘na gaṅgā’’tiādikā gāthā abhāsi.
在这里,萨罗浮是一条河,人们叫它“世间萨罗浮”。尼那伽河和婆蹉罗婆底河,就是名叫“阿致罗筏底”的那条河。这里的“或”字,在一切地方都表示不确定的意思。因此,它把没有说到的戈达瓦里河、旃陀跋伽河等也都包括进来了。以有生命为意义,众生的污垢,戒水能洗净它,而恒河等河流却不能洗净那些污垢。应当把第一首偈颂里的“不”字拿来,与这里连接起来理解。珠,就是珍珠串(珍珠串成的珠鬘)。宝石,就是琉璃等宝石。圣,就是清净。由戒产生的名声之香,因为令人悦意,且能遍及诸方,所以被称为“戒香”。那戒香逆风也飘送。因此世尊说:“善人的香也逆风而行。”过失之力,名为犯戒的行为,戒不令其生起,故当知戒能灭过失之力。巴利
Tattha sarabhūti ekā nadī, ‘‘yaṃ loke sarabhū’’ti vadanti. Ninnagā vāciravatīti ‘‘aciravatī’’ti evaṃnāmikā nadī, vāti sabbattha vā-saddo aniyamattho. Tena avuttā godhāvarīcandabhāgādikā saṅgaṇhāti. Pāṇanaṭṭhena pāṇīnaṃ sattānaṃ yaṃ malaṃ sīlajalaṃ visodhayati, taṃ malaṃ visodhetuṃ na sakkuṇanti gaṅgādayo nadiyoti paṭhamagāthāya na-kāraṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Hārāti muttāhārā. Maṇayoti veḷuriyādimaṇayo. Ariyanti visuddhaṃ. Sīlasamuṭṭhāno kittisaddo gandho manoharabhāvato, disāsu abhibyāpanato ca ‘‘sīlagandho’’ti vutto. So hi paṭivātepi pavattati. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘satañca gandho paṭivātametī’’ti (dha. pa. 54; a. ni. 3.80; mi. pa. 5.4.1). Dosānaṃ balaṃ nāma vatthujjhācāro, taṃ tesaṃ kātuṃ adentaṃ sīlaṃ dosānaṃ balaṃ ghātetīti veditabbaṃ.
戒的分类注释巴利
Sīlappabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
10 “有几种”这里,“种”这个词是“部分、类别”的意思,就像“以一种方式收摄色法”等说法里那样;或者表示“种类”的意思,也就是问:戒有多少种,戒的种类差别有多少。“以戒的特相”是指以被称为“戒”的那种自性。巴利
10.‘‘Katividha’’nti ettha vidha-saddo koṭṭhāsapariyāyo ‘‘ekavidhena rūpasaṅgaho’’tiādīsu viya, pakārattho vā, katippakāraṃ kittakā sīlassa pakārabhedāti attho. Sīlanalakkhaṇenāti sīlanasaṅkhātena sabhāvena.
他们依此而行,在诸戒中达到圆满,所以叫“行”;这行本身就是“应行”。由于被禁止,他们以此保护、守护自己,所以叫“禁止”。增上的正行是“增上行”;致力于此,或者彼是此的目的,所以叫“属于增上行的”。是梵行的开始,所以叫“初梵行”;它本身就是“具有初梵行的”。依此而远离,或自己远离,或远离的行为就是“离”;不远离就是“不离”。因依止而称为“依止的”,不依止就是“不依止的”。有边际的,就是“有边际的”;以时间为边际,就是“时边际”;或者说,如所限定的时间就是它的边际,所以叫“时边际”。以生命的存活为终极,就是“至命终的”。以自己的资具在世间中系属,或者在此中被知晓的,就是“世间的”。超越世间的,就是“出世间的”。巴利
Caranti tena sīlesu paripūrakāritaṃ upagacchantīti carittaṃ, carittameva cārittaṃ. Vāritato tena attānaṃ tāyanti rakkhantīti vārittaṃ. Adhiko samācāro abhisamācāro, tattha niyuttaṃ, so vā payojanaṃ etassāti ābhisamācārikaṃ. Ādi brahmacariyassāti ādibrahmacariyaṃ, tadeva ādibrahmacariyakaṃ. Viramati etāya, sayaṃ vā viramati, viramaṇaṃ vā virati, na viratīti avirati. Nissayatīti nissitaṃ, na nissitanti anissitaṃ. Pariyanto etassa atthīti pariyantaṃ, kālena pariyantaṃ kālapariyantaṃ, yathāparicchinno vā kālo pariyanto etassāti kālapariyantaṃ. Yāva pāṇanaṃ jīvanaṃ koṭi etassāti āpāṇakoṭikaṃ. Attano paccayehi loke niyuttaṃ, tattha vā viditanti lokiyaṃ. Lokaṃ uttaratīti lokuttaraṃ.
从因和果两方面来看,比中等和殊胜的法更低劣,或者从它们的功德上退失了,所以叫“低劣”。依靠自己的资具而被引导到主要地位,所以叫“殊胜”。处于这两者中间的,就是“中等”。从“以自己为主宰”而来的,是“以自己为主宰的”。剩下两个词也是同样的道理。被贪爱或邪见执取、被破坏的,是“被执取的”。因为反对它,所以是“不被执取的”。烦恼已经止息的,是“已止息的”。在诸学处中产生的,或者属于有学圣者的,是“有学的”。因为已经完成学处的作用,属于无学法范畴的,是“无学的”。通过否定这两者,是“非有学非无学的”。倾向于退失,或者有退失的成分,就是“退失分的”。其余几个词也是同样的道理。因为有限量,所以是有边际的;戒又具足清净,就是“有边际清净戒”。因为无量,所以是无边际的;戒又具足清净,就是“无边际清净戒”。完全圆满,戒又具足清净,就是“圆满清净戒”。巴利
Paccayato, phalato ca majjhimapaṇītehi nihīnaṃ, tesaṃ vā guṇehi parihīnanti hīnaṃ. Attano paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītanti paṇītaṃ. Ubhinnameva vemajjhe bhavaṃ majjhimaṃ. Attādhipatito āgataṃ attādhipateyyaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Taṇhāya, diṭṭhiyā vā parāmaṭṭhaṃ padhaṃsitanti parāmaṭṭhaṃ. Tappaṭikkhepato aparāmaṭṭhaṃ. Paṭippassaddhakilesaṃ paṭippassaddhaṃ. Sikkhāsu jātaṃ, sekkhassa idanti vā sekkhaṃ. Pariniṭṭhitasikkhākiccatāya asekkhadhammapariyāpannaṃ asekkhaṃ. Tadubhayapaṭikkhepena nevasekkhanāsekkhaṃ. Hānaṃ bhajati, hānabhāgo vā etassa atthīti hānabhāgiyaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Appaparimāṇattā pariyantavantaṃ, pārisuddhivantañca sīlaṃ pariyantapārisuddhisīlaṃ. Anappaparimāṇattā apariyantaṃ, pārisuddhivantañca sīlaṃ apariyantapārisuddhisīlaṃ. Sabbaso puṇṇaṃ, pārisuddhivantañca sīlaṃ paripuṇṇapārisuddhisīlaṃ.
11 “依所说的方法”,就是依照前面所说的“以习行为含义的戒”等那样来说明的方法。这里说“这是应当做的”,指的是完成所制定的学处,也就是属于增上行的应当做、应当实行的事,这样就是完成所制定的学处戒。因为完成学处戒的人,就是在完成并守护学处。或者,由于应当学、应当实行,学本身就是学处;也应当这样理解:完成它。说“这是不应当做的”,就是不做被禁止的事,也就是不做世尊所禁止的恶行,不做并远离。说“他们行”,是指具足那种戒的人安住其中,这是在说明戒是他们活动的依处,显示戒是他们行为的立足处。因此说“他们因在诸戒中圆满而行”。“被禁止的”,是指“这是不应当做的”所遮止的、不适宜的事。“他们保护”,是指仅仅通过不做而得到保护。因此,这是指禁止戒。或者,导师在这里禁止,或以此而禁止,所以是“被禁止的”,即学处。不违犯它而保护,就是禁止戒。“以信和精进成就”,是指应当以信和策励的精进来成就。因为无信者和懈怠者不能圆满行持与行道;只有具信者,对导师所禁止的,即使极微小的过失也见到怖畏,受持并学习诸学处,所以说“禁止戒以信成就”。巴利
11.Vuttanayenāti ‘‘sīlanaṭṭhena sīla’’ntiādinā (visuddhi. 1.7) heṭṭhā vuttena nayena. Idaṃ kattabbanti paññattasikkhāpadapūraṇanti idaṃ ābhisamācārikaṃ kattabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbanti evaṃ paññattassa sikkhāpadasīlassa pūraṇaṃ. Sikkhāpadasīlaṃ hi pūrento sikkhāpadampi pūreti pāleti nāma. Sikkhā eva vā sikkhitabbato, paṭipajjitabbato ca sikkhāpadaṃ. Tassa pūraṇantipi yojetabbaṃ. Idaṃ na kattabbanti paṭikkhittassa akaraṇanti idaṃ duccaritaṃ na kattabbanti bhagavatā paṭikkhittassa akaraṇaṃ viramaṇaṃ. Caranti tasminti tasmiṃ sīle taṃsamaṅgino carantīti sīlassa adhikaraṇataṃ vibhāvento tesaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘sīlesu paripūrakāritāya pavattantī’’ti. Vāritanti idaṃ na kattabbanti paṭikkhittaṃ akappiyaṃ . Tāyantīti akaraṇeneva tāyanti. Tenāti vārittasīlamāha. Vāreti vā satthā ettha, etena vāti vāritaṃ, sikkhāpadaṃ. Taṃ avikopento tāyanti tenāti vārittaṃ. Saddhāvīriyasādhananti saddhāya, uṭṭhānavīriyena ca sādhetabbaṃ. Na hi asaddho, kusīto ca vattapaṭipattiṃ paripūreti, saddho eva satthārā paṭikkhitte aṇumattepi vajje bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti āha ‘‘saddhāsādhanaṃ vāritta’’nti.
因为属于增上戒学,所以是殊胜的行为,因此称为“增上行”,所以说“最上的行为”。增上行本身就是“增上行学处”,就像“律藏者”这个说法一样,这是它的意旨。增上行从最高层面的解说来讲,就是道戒和果戒;为了它、针对它、以它为目的、以它为用途而制定的,就是增上行学处。三种极其清净的身业、四种极其清净的语业,以及极其清净的活命,这就是活命第八戒。其中,虽然从活命的因由来说,远离七种恶行就是正命,这样也有七种,但按照正命性的共同特征,把它归为一种来说。或者,把依三种诡诈事由而远离邪命合在一起,说“活命极其清净”。由于是最胜的行为,道本身就是梵行,称为道梵行,属于它。成为起始状态,是指在开始时应当修习、应当成就的,已经成就的、已经达到的,称为起始状态。虽然按照说法的次第,以正见为开端,但按照修行的次第,则以活命第八戒为开端。由于它的成就,也就是由于增上行学处的成就、圆满,初梵行得以成就。因为,如果有人连轻微的、过失很少的事都能避免,那么他必定能避免重大的、过失很多的、过患众多的事,这根本不必多说。经文则以反面的方式阐明这个道理。其中,“法”指戒。因为戒以持守上位殊胜功德之义而称为法。巴利
Adhisīlasikkhāpariyāpannattā abhivisiṭṭho samācāroti abhisamācāroti āha ‘‘uttamasamācāro’’ti. Abhisamācārova ābhisamācārikaṃ, yathā venayikoti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8) adhippāyo. Abhisamācāro ukkaṭṭhaniddesato maggasīlaṃ, phalasīlañca, taṃ ārabbha uddissa tadatthaṃ tappayojanaṃ paññattaṃ ābhisamācārikaṃ. Suparisuddhāni tīṇi kāyakammāni, cattāri vacīkammāni, suparisuddho ājīvoti idaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakaṃ. Tattha kāmaṃ ājīvahetukato sattavidhaduccaritato virati sammāājīvoti sopi sattavidho hoti, sammājīvatāsāmaññena pana taṃ ekaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā tividhakuhanavatthusannissayato micchājīvato viratiṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vutto ‘‘ājīvo suparisuddho’’ti. Seṭṭhacariyabhāvato maggo eva brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ, tassa. Ādibhāvabhūtanti ādimhi bhāvetabbataṃ nipphādetabbataṃ bhūtaṃ pattaṃ ādibhāvabhūtaṃ. Kiñcāpi desanānukkamena sammādiṭṭhi ādi, paṭipattikkamena pana ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ ādīti. Tassa sampattiyāti ābhisamācārikassa sampajjanena paripūraṇena ādibrahmacariyakaṃ sampajjati. Yo hi lahukānipi appasāvajjāni parivajjeti, so garukāni mahāsāvajjāni bahvādīnavāni parivajjessatīti vattabbameva natthīti. Suttaṃ pana etamatthaṃ byatirekavasena vibhāveti. Tattha dhammanti sīlaṃ. Taṃ hi upariguṇavisesānaṃ dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhammoti vuccati.
为了显示远离戒和其他戒虽然有联系等等,却并不混杂,所以说是“只是远离”。巴利
Viratisīlassa itarasīlena satipi sampayogādike asammissakatādassanatthaṃ ‘‘veramaṇimatta’’nti vuttaṃ.
在“依止与非依止”这一部分,为了先说明可以得到的依止,所以说了“依止”等话。其中,因为贪行者应当依止贪,所以贪本身就是贪依止。见依止也是这样。见行者即使在没有见、没有贪的情况下,也还是依着见而活动。“天”是指四大王天、帝释天、夜摩天等众所周知的天。“某天”则是指不为人知的天。只依止贪,就是贪依止。也有人说是“依止于贪”。这种说法和“两种依止”等说法相冲突。“净见”是指“这样轮回就会清净”这种见,指的是出世间戒。属于它的,就是属于出世间的,是资粮、是因,意思是顺决择分的依止。巴利
‘‘Nissitānissitavasenā’’ti ettha labbhamānanissayaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘nissayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhācaritena nissayitabbato taṇhāva taṇhānissayo. Tathā diṭṭhinissayo. Diṭṭhicarito hi asatipi diṭṭhiyā taṇhāvirahe diṭṭhinissitova pavattati. Devoti catumahārājasakkasuyāmādipākaṭadevamāha . Devaññataroti apākaṭaṃ. Taṇhaṃ eva nissitanti taṇhānissitaṃ. Taṇhāya nissitanti ca keci vadanti. Tesaṃ ‘‘dve nissayā’’tiādinā virujjhati. Suddhidiṭṭhiyāti ‘‘iti saṃsārasuddhi bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ pavattadiṭṭhiyā, lokuttaraṃ sīlanti adhippāyo. Tassevāti lokuttarasseva sambhārabhūtaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ, vivaṭṭūpanissayanti attho.
作了时间限定:就像“此夜、此日”等(《增支部》8.41)那样,按时间来划定范围。为了说明即使没有作时间限定,只要受持之后中途不中断,并且依所获得的远离一直持续到命终,也不算“尽寿”,所以才说“尽形寿受持之后,也同样地持续下去”。巴利
Kālaparicchedaṃ katvāti ‘‘imañca rattiṃ, imañca diva’’ntiādinā (a. ni. 8.41) viya kālavasena paricchedaṃ katvā. Kālaparicchedaṃ akatvā samādinnampi antarāvicchinnaṃ sampattavirativasena yāvajīvaṃ pavattitampi āpāṇakoṭikaṃ na hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yāvajīvaṃ samādiyitvā tatheva pavattita’’nti vuttaṃ.
从利养、名誉、亲属、身体、生命这几个方面来说:为了让还没生起的利养和名誉生起,为了让已经生起的利养和名誉得到守护和增长,也为了不让亲属、身体和生命遭到破坏。他难道会去违犯吗?意思是说,如果一个人连违犯的念头都不生起,他还会用身体和言语去违犯吗?这是不可能的。这里“难道”这个词,确实是用来表示否定的。巴利
Lābhayasañātiaṅgajīvitavasenāti lābhayasānaṃ anuppannānaṃ uppādanavasena, uppannānaṃ rakkhaṇavasena ceva vaḍḍhanavasena ca ñātiaṅgajīvitānaṃ avināsanavasena. Kiṃ so vītikkamissatīti yo vītikkamāya cittampi na uppādeti, so kāyavācāhi vītikkamissatīti kiṃ idaṃ, natthetanti attho. Paṭikkhepe hi ayaṃ kiṃ-saddo.
因为以所缘的方式,就像疮口一样,从欲漏等诸漏中流出来,所以即使没有相应关系,也与诸漏共存,因此叫“有漏”。戒属于三地法所摄,所以说“有漏戒是世间戒”。殊胜的有,就是胜妙的有。律,指律藏的教法,或者其中所制定的学处。喜悦,是初生的喜。如实智见,是照见名色及其因缘,或者以它为所依的初步观。厌离,是厌离智,以此说明强力的观。离欲,是道。解脱,是阿拉汉果。解脱智见,是省察智。谈论,是关于律的谈论。讨论,是对律的考察。近依,就是前面所说的次第因缘,也就是亲依止。出世间戒,是与道心、果心相应的活命第八戒。其中,道戒能带来出离诸有,也是省察智的所依;果戒则只是省察智的所依。巴利
Ārammaṇabhāvena vaṇo viya āsave kāmāsavādike paggharatīti sampayogabhāvābhāvepi sahāsavehīti sāsavaṃ. Tebhūmakadhammajātanti sīlaṃ tappariyāpannanti āha ‘‘sāsavaṃ sīlaṃ lokiya’’nti. Bhavavisesā sampattibhavā. Vinayoti vinayapariyatti, tattha vā āgatasikkhāpadāni. Pāmojjaṃ taruṇapīti. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ sapaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ, tadadhiṭṭhānā vā taruṇavipassanā. Nibbidāti nibbidāñāṇaṃ. Tena balavavipassanamāha. Virāgo maggo. Vimutti arahattaphalaṃ. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇā. Kathāti vinayakathā. Mantanāti vinayavicāraṇā. Upanisāti yathāvuttakāraṇaparamparāsaṅkhāto upanissayo. Lokuttaraṃ maggaphalacittasampayuttaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ. Tattha maggasīlaṃ bhavanissaraṇāvahaṃ hoti, paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa ca bhūmi, phalasīlaṃ pana paccavekkhaṇāñāṇasseva bhūmi.
12 12. 依于下劣的胜解,欲等也成为下劣;依于殊胜的胜解,成为殊胜;依于这两者的中间状态,成为中等。正如业依造作方式而有下劣等种种差别,欲等也依生起的方式而有差别。而它们生起的方式,应当知道是由胜解的不同所造成的。为了名誉,是指喜好名声称誉,或者贪求眷属。“像我这样的人,怎么能做这种事”——这是依于厌弃恶行、依止圣性。无杂染,是指不被自赞毁他和其他烦恼所杂染。为了有与财富,是指为了殊胜有的成就和财富的成就。为了自己的解脱而生起,这是指声闻、独觉、菩萨的戒。为了所有众生的解脱,是指为了让一切众生从轮回的束缚中解脱。波罗蜜戒,是大菩萨的戒。被悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、以菩提为所缘而生起、达到最极清净与减损、远离时间处所众生等分别的,就是戒波罗蜜。巴利
12. Hīnādhimuttivasena chandādīnampi hīnatā. Paṇītādhimuttivasena paṇītatā. Tadubhayavemajjhatāvasena majjhimatā. Yatheva hi kammaṃ āyūhanavasena hīnādibhedabhinnaṃ hoti, evaṃ chandādayopi pavattiākāravasena. So ca nesaṃ pavattiākāro adhimuttibhedenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasakāmatāyāti kittisilokābhiratiyā, parivāricchāya vā. ‘‘Kathaṃ nāma mādiso īdisaṃ kareyyā’’ti pāpajigucchāya ariyabhāvaṃ nissāya. Anupakkiliṭṭhanti attukkaṃsanaparavambhanāhi, aññehi ca upakkilesehi anupakkiliṭṭhaṃ. Bhavabhogatthāyāti bhavasampattiatthañceva bhogasampattiatthañca. Attano vimokkhatthāya pavattitanti sāvakapaccekabodhisattasīlamāha. Sabbasattānaṃ vimokkhatthāyāti sabbasattānaṃ saṃsārabandhanato vimocanatthāya. Pāramitāsīlaṃ mahābodhisattasīlaṃ. Yā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā mahābodhiṃ ārabbha pavattā paramukkaṃsagatasoceyyasallekhā desakālasattādivikapparahitā sīlapāramitā.
不相称,就是不适合。以自己为尊、为主宰,这叫自重,是以惭为增上。从自增上而来的,就是自增上。以世间为尊、为主宰,这叫世间增上,是以愧为增上。这法名为有大威德、决定出离,它只应通过修行来恭敬。因此,想要恭敬法之伟大的人,应当这样:我将以戒具足来恭敬它。巴利
Ananurūpanti asāruppaṃ. Attā eva garu adhipati etassāti attagaru, lajjādhiko. Attādhipatito āgataṃ attādhipateyyaṃ. Loko adhipati garu etassāti lokādhipati, ottappādhiko. Dhammo nāmāyaṃ mahānubhāvo ekantaniyyāniko, so ca paṭipattiyāva pūjetabbo. Tasmā ‘‘naṃ sīlasampadāya pūjessāmī’’ti evaṃ dhammamahattaṃ pūjetukāmena.
未被执取,就是由于堕落而被沾染。渴爱和邪见确实会执取这样的戒——有人想“靠这个戒,我会成为天人,或者成为某位天人;靠这个戒,我会得到轮回的清净”——它们执取那个戒,就使它走向堕落,因为这样一来,戒就不能成为圣道的亲依止缘。凡夫中的善者,就是凡夫当中那些善良的人。他虽然是凡夫,却具备戒等善法。由于执取的烦恼已被镇伏、已被断除,所以那些烦恼不再执取他,这就是未被执取。由于种种烦恼的热恼已经止息、已经平息,这就是已寂止。巴利
Parāmaṭṭhattāti parābhavavasena āmaṭṭhattā. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyo hi ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā, iminā me sīlena saṃsārasuddhi bhavissatī’’ti pavattassa sīlaṃ parāmasantiyo taṃ parābhavaṃ pāpenti maggassa anupanissayabhāvakaraṇato. Puthujjanakalyāṇakassāti puthujjanesu kalyāṇakassa. So hi puthujjanova hutvā kalyāṇehi sīlādīhi samannāgato. Parāmasanakilesānaṃ vikkhambhanato, samucchindanato ca tehi na parāmaṭṭhanti aparāmaṭṭhaṃ. Tassa tassa kilesadarathassa paṭippassambhanato vūpasamanato paṭippassaddhaṃ.
已作对治:就是通过出罪等羯磨,按照戒法作出补救。这样,那条戒才真正恢复清净。所以说“那条戒是清净的”。“已作对治”这个说法,也应当理解为包含了“今后不再这样犯”的决意。对于在事情上犹豫“这是熊肉还是猪肉”之类,或者在罪上犹豫“这是波逸提还是恶作”之类,或者在行为上犹豫“我到底有没有违犯那件事”之类,因而陷入疑惑、产生怀疑的人,应当依照戒法,通过对治来净化。疑惑本身就是“有疑”,意思是当这种疑惑生起的时候。应当去除疑惑:要么自己审查那件事,要么去问持律者,把疑惑消除。而已经没有疑惑的人,如果是允许的就应当去做,如果是不允许的就应当舍弃。所以说“这样他就会安稳”。巴利
Katapaṭikammanti vuṭṭhānadesanāhi yathādhammaṃ katapaṭikāraṃ. Evaṃ hi taṃ sīlaṃ paṭipākatikameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ visuddha’’nti. ‘‘Katapaṭikamma’’nti iminā ca ‘‘na punevaṃ karissa’’nti adhiṭṭhānampi saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Acchamaṃsaṃ nu kho, sūkaramaṃsaṃ nu kho’’tiādinā vatthumhi vā, ‘‘pācittiyaṃ nu kho, dukkaṭaṃ nu kho’’tiādinā āpattiyā vā, ‘‘mayā taṃ vatthu vītikkantaṃ nu kho, na nu kho vītikkanta’’ntiādinā ajjhācāre vā vematikassa saṃsayāpannassa. Visodhetabbaṃ yathādhammaṃ paṭikammena. Vimati eva vematikaṃ, tasmiṃ vematike sati, vimatiyā uppannāyāti attho. Vimati paṭivinetabbāti sayaṃ vā taṃ vatthuṃ vicāretvā, vinayadhare vā pucchitvā kaṅkhā vinodetabbā. Nikkaṅkhena pana kappiyaṃ ce kātabbaṃ, akappiyaṃ ce chaḍḍetabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘iccassa phāsu bhavissatī’’ti.
“以四圣道”等语,说的是属于道与果、并与道果相应的戒。正如用于整体的称呼也适用于各个部分。“其余”就是指一切世间戒。巴利
‘‘Catūhiariyamaggehī’’tiādinā maggaphalapariyāpannaṃ sīlaṃ maggaphalasampayuttaṃ vuttaṃ. Samudāyesu pavattavohārā avayavesupi pavattantīti. Sesanti sabbaṃ lokiyasīlaṃ.
本性也是自性。性情柔和、言语和蔼、容易相处。以那种方式,就是以表达本义的说法。有些无记的戒在这里与所意指的戒归为一类,为了说明它不与不善相应,所以说了“其中不善”等话。意思就是:这里取的是有学三法,没有引入善三法。依照所说的方式,不取善三法,而按劣三法等五种三法,应当知道这个戒有三种。巴利
Pakatipīti sabhāvopi. Sukhasīlo sakhilo sukhasaṃvāso. Tena pariyāyenāti pakatiatthavācakatthena. Ekaccaṃ abyākataṃ sīlaṃ idhādhippetasīlena ekasaṅgahanti akusalassevāyujjamānataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha akusala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi sekkhattikaṃ idha gahitaṃ, idha na upanītaṃ kusalattikanti adhippāyo. Vuttanayenevāti vutteneva nayena kusalattikaṃ aggahetvā hīnattikādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ tikānaṃ vasena assa sīlassa tividhatā veditabbā.
13 13.“若人于此”在这里指某个人。违犯事,就是在犯戒的所依事上违越、越轨。欲寻等九种大寻就是邪思惟。像这样的,就是这种。因为这样的人不亲近持戒的人,反而亲近破戒的人,由此随顺他们的见解,在违犯戒律时看不见过失;由于邪思惟很多,又不守护以意为第六的六根,他的戒就必定是退失分,而不是住立分,更不用说殊胜分等了。戒成就,就是四遍清净戒的戒圆满。不努力向上的人,就是不精进追求更上殊胜证得的人。戒成为住立分,因为它不导向定。当定被成就时,戒能导向定的性质才被确定。为了定,就是为了依止寂止而等持。厌离就是观。取厌离是为了显示强有力的观,因为仅凭这一点,也就足以成立戒属于决择分。巴利
13.Yodhāti yo idha. Vatthuvītikkameti āpattiyā vatthuno vītikkamane ajjhācāre. Kāmasaṅkappādayo nava mahāvitakkā micchāsaṅkappā. Evarūpassāti edisassa. Tassa hi sīlavante anupasaṅkamitvā dussīle sevantassa tato eva tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjanena paṇṇattivītikkame adosadassāvino micchāsaṅkappabahulatāya manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni arakkhato sīlaṃ ekaṃseneva hānabhāgiyaṃ hoti, na ṭhitibhāgiyaṃ, kuto visesādibhāgiyatā. Sīlasampattiyāti sīlapāripūriyā catupārisuddhisīlena. Aghaṭantassa uttarīti uttari visesādhigamāya avāyamantassa. Ṭhitibhāgiyaṃ sīlaṃ bhavati asamādhisaṃvattaniyattā. Sampādite hi samādhismiṃ sīlassa samādhisaṃvattaniyatā nicchiyati. Samādhatthāyāti samathavasena samādhānatthāya. Nibbidanti vipassanaṃ. Balavavipassanādassanatthaṃ nibbidāgahaṇaṃ tāvatāpi sīlassa nibbedhabhāgiyabhāvasiddhito.
“凡那些学处,他们都应当守护”,这是文句之间的连接。不过,这些学处由于不是共通制定的,所以是另外一些。“他们”这个词是呼应“应当守护”一语,是表示行为者的所有格,意思是“那些比丘”。或者,当有策励时,也就是策励他们精勤守护戒的时候。“十”是指沙弥应当守护的戒,就像陶匠等人那样。“八”则是把远离跳舞、唱歌、戴花鬘等合为一类,所有最后禁止的条目加起来就是八条。巴利
Yāni ca sikkhāpadāni nesaṃ rakkhitabbānīti sambandho, tāni pana asādhāraṇapaññattito aññāni. Nesanti ‘‘rakkhitabbānī’’ti padaṃ apekkhitvā kattari sāmivacanaṃ, tehi bhikkhūhīti attho. Sati vā ussāheti ussakkitvā sīlāni rakkhituṃ ussāhe sati. Dasāti sāmaṇerehi rakkhitabbasīlamāha ghaṭikārādīnaṃ viya. Aṭṭhāti naccādimālādiveramaṇiṃ ekaṃ katvā sabbapacchimavajjāni aṭṭha.
不违犯,就是对五戒的不违犯。本性戒就是自性戒。因为北俱卢洲人的戒是依投生处而决定的。限界行仪戒:对于各种应当避免的事不去做,这就成为界限;在各家各族等地,由先辈所制定的行为规范。家族法、地方法、教派法,就是所说的行仪戒。其中,家族法好比婆罗门等的不饮酒等;地方法好比某些地区居民的不伤害等;教派法好比外道的禁制等。外道的见解被见网和爱网缠住而流转,或者对圣者的律仪设下网障,所以称为教派。由于有本性即是具戒者这一说法,菩萨母的五学处戒是圆满的。而这一最上者,菩萨父也仅以心念生起就不被染污,称为法性戒。与欲乐相关的,就是与欲的部分中味著相关的,耽著于欲味。法性戒:就是依法性、依因缘决定而来的戒。因为戒波罗蜜修到了极顶,入胎的大菩萨以戒的威德和功德力,菩萨母自然就具有极为严苛的戒。大迦叶等,等字包含了跋陀等。据说他们在极长的时间里一直是极为清净的持戒者,所以说清净众生。在各各生中,就是在戒王、水牛王等生中。在前前生中已经成就的因,就是这前因戒。这一戒应当理解为:虽然没有受持本性戒等,却具足不违犯的特征,含摄自然远离。巴利
Avītikkamoti pañcannaṃ sīlānaṃ avītikkamo. Pakatisīlanti sabhāvasīlaṃ. Tatrūpapattiniyataṃ hi sīlaṃ uttarakurukānaṃ. Mariyādācārittanti tassa tassa sāvajjassa akaraṇe mariyādabhūtaṃ, tattha tattha kulādīsu pubbapurisehi ṭhapitaṃ cārittaṃ. Kuladesapāsaṇḍadhammo hi ‘‘ācārasīla’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tattha kuladhammo tāva brāhmaṇādīnaṃ amajjapānādi, desadhammo ekaccajanapadavāsīnaṃ ahiṃsanādi, pāsaṇḍadhammo titthiyānaṃ yamaniyamādi. Titthiyamataṃ hi diṭṭhipāsena, taṇhāpāsena ca ḍeti pavattati, pāsaṃ vā bādhaṃ ariyavinayassa ḍetīti ‘‘pāsaṇḍa’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Pakatiyā sīlavatī hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.20) vacanato bodhisattamātu pañcasikkhāpadasīlaṃ paripuṇṇameva. Idaṃ pana ukkaṃsagataṃ bodhisattapitaripi cittuppādamattenapi asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ ‘‘dhammatāsīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Kāmaguṇūpasaṃhitanti kāmakoṭṭhāsesu assādūpasaṃhitaṃ kāmassādagadhitaṃ. Dhammatāsīlanti dhammatāya kāraṇaniyāmena āgataṃ sīlaṃ. Sīlapāramiṃ hi paramukkaṃsaṃ pāpetvā kucchigatassa mahābodhisattassa sīlatejena guṇānubhāvena bodhisattamātu saraseneva paramasallekhappattaṃ sīlaṃ hoti. Mahākassapādīnanti ādi-saddena bhaddādike saṅgaṇhāti. Te kira suciraṃ kālaṃ suparisuddhasīlā eva hutvā āgatā. Tenāha ‘‘suddhasattāna’’nti. Tāsu tāsu jātīsūti sīlavarājamahiṃsarājādijātīsu. Pubbe purimajātiyaṃ siddho hetu etassāti pubbahetukasīlaṃ. Idaṃ pana pakatisīlādisamādānena vinā avītikkamalakkhaṇaṃ sampattaviratisaṅgahaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
世尊如是所说之戒,即为关联。这里“此处”是为了说明:对于将要讲述的戒的圆满者来说,它是作为其依止处的教法,同时也否定了其他教法具有同样的性质。因为经中这样说:“比丘们,只有在这里才有沙门……其他外道之论说空无沙门。”说“比丘”,是为了指出那位戒的圆满者。说“以巴帝摩卡防护而防护”,是为了指出他安立在巴帝摩卡戒上。“住”是为了指出他具备与那相应的生活方式。“具足行处与行境”是为了指出对巴帝摩卡防护以及往后所要证得的功德有帮助的法。“于微细罪中见怖畏”是为了指出他不从巴帝摩卡戒退堕。“受持”是为了指出他毫无遗漏地受持诸学处。“学”是为了指出他具备学。“于诸学处”是为了指出应当学的法。至于这里应当说的内容,后面会清楚显现。巴利
Yaṃ bhagavatā evaṃ vuttaṃ sīlanti sambandho. Idhāti vakkhamānasīlaparipūrakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpanaṃ, aññasāsanassa ca tathābhāvapaṭisedhanaṃ. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214; ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241). Bhikkhūti tassa sīlassa paripūrakapuggalaparidīpanaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti idamassa pātimokkhasīle patiṭṭhitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Viharatīti idamassa tadanurūpavihārasamaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Ācāragocarasampannoti idaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarassa, upariadhigantabbaguṇānañca upakārakadhammaparidīpanaṃ. Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti idaṃ pātimokkhato acavanabhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Samādāyāti sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesato ādānaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhatīti sikkhāya samaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ . Sikkhāpadesūti sikkhitabbadhammaparidīpanaṃ. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
“他”是指已经安立在巴帝摩卡防护戒上的比丘。接着要显示的是:像他那样的根律仪戒应当是怎样的。以眼显示他的防护是从哪里生起的。以色显示他的防护是在哪里生起的。见已不执取相、不执取随相,显示防护的方法。若因……(中略)……诸漏随转,显示防护的对立面以及其中的过患。为防护而行道,显示应当预先安立正念。守护眼根,显示安立正念本身就是对眼根的守护。于眼根防护而转,显示在这里,那样的正念就是防护。关联是“由于违犯”。六学处,是指“以活命为因、以活命为缘,宣称不实、不存在的上人法”等所说的、与六种波罗夷等相关的学处。用周边暗示等三种诡诈手段使人惊异,就是诡诈。抬高自己或施主,使对方因此给出某物,这样说话就是谄媚。能让人产生施与想法、由身语造作的行为称为相;以这个相而行,或者造作这个相的人,就是相士;他的状态就是相士性。像对香等那样,为了利养而以责骂等方式压榨他人,就是压榨;压榨本身就是压榨者;他的状态就是压榨者性。因为多欲,拿自己得到的利养,又去从别人那里寻求利养,就是以利求利的贪求。像这些——用“等”字还包括说爱语、奉承之类。通过简择、观察而清净、没有杂染,就是简择清净。四种资具借此而被受用,所以是四资具受用;如此生起的无过失思,也是如此。巴利
Soti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle patiṭṭhitabhikkhu. Tena yādisassa indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ icchitabbaṃ, taṃ dasseti. Cakkhunāti yato so saṃvaro, taṃ dasseti. Rūpanti yattha so saṃvaro, taṃ dasseti. Disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhīti saṃvarassa upāyaṃ dasseti. Yatvādhikaraṇa…pe… anvāssaveyyunti saṃvarassa paṭipakkhaṃ tattha ādīnavaṃ dasseti. Saṃvarāya paṭipajjatīti pageva satiyā upaṭṭhapetabbataṃ dasseti. Rakkhati cakkhundriyanti satiyā upaṭṭhāpanameva cakkhundriyassa ārakkhāti dasseti. Cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatīti tathābhūtā satiyevettha saṃvaroti dasseti. Vītikkamassa vasenāti sambandho. Channaṃ sikkhāpadānanti ‘‘ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā asantaṃ abhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapatī’’tiādinā āgatānaṃ channaṃ pārājikādipaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ. Sāmantajappanādinā tividhena kuhanavatthunā vimhāpanaṃ kuhanā. Attānaṃ, dāyakaṃ vā ukkhipitvā yathā so kiñci dadāti, evaṃ kathanaṃ lapanā. Nimittaṃ vuccati paccayadānasaññuppādakaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ, tena nimittena carati, nimittaṃ vā karotīti nemittiko, tassa bhāvo nemittikatā. Gandhādayo viya lābhāya paresaṃ akkosanādinā nipisatīti nippeso, nippesova nippesiko, tassa bhāvo nippesikatā. Mahicchatāya attanā laddhalābhena parato lābhapariyesanā lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatā. Evamādīnanti ādi-saddena anuppiyabhāṇitācāṭukamyatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Paṭisaṅkhānena paccavekkhaṇāya parisuddho asaṃkiliṭṭho paṭisaṅkhānaparisuddho. Cattāro paccayā paribhuñjīyanti etenāti catupaccayaparibhogo, tathāpavattā anavajjacetanā.
巴帝摩卡防护戒的注释巴利
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlavaṇṇanā
14 这里,“其中”是指巴帝摩卡防护等这些内容当中。“从最初开始”是指从“在此,比丘”等教导的最开头起。“决断说”是指在那里通过消除疑惑而带来决断的解说。因为第一层含义是共通于所有人的,为了显示不共通、专属于出家人的说法,所以说“或因穿着割截破碎的衣等”。这样就显示了他具备圆满巴帝摩卡防护的资格。然而,穿破碎衣等状态,即使是贫穷被惩罚的人也会有,为了从中区分出来,说了“以信出家”;为了显示在修行实践上有资格,说了“良家子”。因为无论是行为良家子还是出身良家子,都能够修行实践。学处戒是指依学处而制定、分为应行与应止的戒。“若”是不限定的指称,指任何一个人。“他”是指属于律范畴的戒。“那”是指那个人。“解脱”是指从共同原因的角度而言。恶趣的有是导致恶趣的。以“等”字涵盖其他一切轮回之苦。防护是指关闭身语二门。凡以彼防护、关闭,那就是防护。然而,因为它是七种罪蕴的不违犯、违犯的对治法,所以说“这是属于身语不违犯之名”。以巴帝摩卡防护而防护是指以巴帝摩卡防护关闭身语二门。如此状态者,因为具备它并以它而具足,所以说“已进入、具备之义”。巴利
14.Tatrāti tesu pātimokkhasaṃvarādīsu. Ādito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘idha bhikkhū’’tiādinā (vibha. 508; dī. ni. 1.194) āgatadesanāya ādito pabhuti. Vinicchayakathāti tattha saṃsayavidhamanena vinicchayāvahā kathā. Paṭhamassa atthassa sabbasādhāraṇattā asādhāraṇaṃ pabbajitāveṇikaṃ pariyāyaṃ dassento ‘‘chinnabhinnapaṭadharāditāya vā’’ti āha. Evaṃ hissa paripuṇṇapātimokkhasaṃvarayogyatā dassitā hoti. Bhinnapaṭadharādibhāvo ca nāma daliddassāpi niggahitassa hotīti tato visesetuṃ ‘‘saddhāpabbajito’’ti vatvā paṭipattiyā yogyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘kulaputto’’ti vuttaṃ. Ācārakulaputto vā hi paṭipajjituṃ sakkoti jātikulaputto vā. Sikkhāpadasīlanti cārittavārittappabhedaṃ sikkhāpadavasena paññattaṃ sīlaṃ. Yoti aniyamaniddeso yo koci puggalo. Nanti vinayapariyāpannaṃ sīlaṃ. Tanti puggalaṃ. Mokkheti sahakārikāraṇabhāvato. Apāye bhavāni āpāyikāni. Ādi-saddena tadaññaṃ sabbasaṃsāradukkhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saṃvaraṇaṃ kāyavacīdvārānaṃ pidahanaṃ. Yena te saṃvutā pihitā honti, so saṃvaro. Yasmā pana so sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamo vītikkamapaṭipakkhoti katvā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyikavācasikassa avītikkamassetaṃ nāma’’nti. Pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro. Tathābhūto ca yasmā taṃ upeto tena ca samaṅgī nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘upagato samannāgatoti attho’’ti.
另一种解释:因为烦恼势力强大,恶行容易做,善行却难以做,所以凡夫常常堕入恶趣,因此称为“堕者”。或者,因为无常,被业力抛掷到诸有等处,像被机器带动一样无法安住而到处流转,所以称为“堕者”;或者,因为死亡,在各类众生中舍弃身体,所以称为“堕者”,这就是众生相续,或者单指心。让这个堕者从轮回之苦中解脱出来,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”(别解脱)。因为心解脱了,众生才被称为“解脱者”。正如经中说:“由心清净而清净”,又说“心不执取,从诸漏中解脱”。或者,以无明等为因,在轮回中堕落、流转、持续,所以称为“堕者”,正如经中说:“被无明遮蔽、被渴爱系缚的众生,到处奔走、轮回流转。”这个堕者众生,通过它从渴爱等三种杂染中解脱出来,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。应该知道这个复合词的构成方式,就像“喉黑”这类词一样。或者,使堕落、使毁灭、使受苦,所以称为“堕者”,指心。正如经中说:“世间被心引导,被心牵引。”这个堕者通过它解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。或者,通过它堕入恶趣之苦和轮回之苦,所以称为“堕者”,指渴爱等杂染。正如经中说:“渴爱产生人”、“以渴爱为伴侣的人”等等。从那个堕者中解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。或者,在其中堕落,所以称为“堕处”,指六内处和六外处。正如经中说:“世间在六处中生起,在六处中建立亲密关系。”从名为六内处六外处的堕处中解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。或者,有堕落、有毁灭,所以称为“堕者”,指轮回。从其中解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。或者,因为是一切世间的主宰,法王世尊被称为“主”。通过它而解脱,所以叫“解脱”;主的解脱,因为由彼而施设,所以叫“主解脱”;主解脱就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,因为是一切功德的根本,以最上之义为“主”,又按前面所说的意义为“解脱”,所以叫“主解脱”;主解脱就是“巴帝摩卡”。正如广说:“巴帝摩卡者,这是入口,这是首要入口。”巴利
Aparo nayo – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato, pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato, puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭiyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa pātanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā. Taṃ pātinaṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto ‘‘vimutto’’ti vuccati. Vuttaṃ hi ‘‘cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti, ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (mahāva. 28) ca. Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pātī, ‘‘avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.124) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkhaṃ . ‘‘Kaṇṭhekāḷo’’tiādīnaṃ viyassa samāsasiddhi veditabbā. Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkheti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttaṃ hi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkhaṃ, patati vā etena apāyadukkhe, saṃsāradukkhe cāti pātī, taṇhādisaṃkileso. Vuttaṃ hi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105; a. ni. 4.9; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkhaṃ. Atha vā patati etthāti pātīni, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Vuttaṃ hi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70; su. ni. 171). Tato chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkhaṃ. Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkhaṃ, atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā ‘‘patī’’ti vuccati. Muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkhaṃ. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttenatthena mokkho cāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkhaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhanti mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
或者,“pa-”是表示方式的前缀,“ati”是表示究竟义的不变词,所以以种种方式究竟解脱,就是“巴帝摩卡”。因为这种戒本身通过彼分断,与定相应、与慧相应的则通过镇伏断,以及通过正断,究竟解脱、令解脱,所以是“巴帝摩卡”;或者,从每一种违犯过失中各自解脱,所以是“巴帝摩卡”;巴帝摩卡就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,“解脱”就是涅槃,它是那种解脱的影像,所以是“巴帝摩卡”。因为戒的防护就像太阳升起时的曙光,是涅槃的生起,又像那(涅槃)的影像,由于随其所应熄灭烦恼,所以巴帝摩卡就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,它朝向解脱而行,或者面向解脱,所以是“巴帝摩卡”,巴帝摩卡就是“巴帝摩卡”,如此在这里,“巴帝摩卡”一词的含义应当理解。行即维持自身。“住”一词显示了安住于巴帝摩卡防护戒的比丘的行住。巴利即禅支分别巴利。巴利
Atha vā pa-iti pakāre, atī-ti accantatthe nipāto, tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Idaṃ hi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena, samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena, samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkhaṃ, pati pati mokkhoti vā patimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamadosato paccekaṃ mokkhoti attho, patimokkho eva pātimokkhaṃ. Mokkhoti vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa paṭibimbabhūtoti patimokkho. Sīlasaṃvaro hi sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo viya yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanato, patimokkhoyeva pātimokkhaṃ. Atha vā mokkhaṃ pati vattati, mokkhābhimukhanti vā patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evamettha pātimokkha-saddassa attho veditabbo. Iriyatīti attabhāvaṃ pavatteti. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro dassito. Pāḷiyanti jhānavibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 508 ādayo).
在这里,为了说明沙门的行仪和行境,所以说了“具足行仪与行境”。不过,就像给人指路时,会先说“放开左边,走右边”,先把该舍弃的说了,再说该取的;又像一个人已经用洗头的方式洗净了身上的汗垢污秽,这时再给他安排花鬘、涂香等装饰,才合适。同样,对于已经断除恶法的人,与善法结合才合适。因此,先举出“有行仪,有非行仪”这两方面,然后为了分别说明非行仪,而说了“其中,什么是非行仪”等等。其中,身的违犯就是三种身恶行;语的违犯就是四种语恶行;身语的违犯就是这两者的结合。巴利
Tattha kāmaṃ samaṇacāraṃ, samaṇagocarañca dassetuṃ ‘‘ācāragocarasampanno’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā pana maggaṃ ācikkhanto ‘‘vāmaṃ muñca, dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vajjetabbapubbakaṃ gahetabbaṃ vadeyya, yathā vā sasīsanhānena pahīnasedamalajallikassa mālāgandhavilepanādivibhūsanasaṃvidhānaṃ yuttarūpaṃ, evaṃ pahīnapāpadhammassa kalyāṇadhammasamāyogo yuttarūpoti ‘‘atthi ācāro, atthi anācāro’’ti dvayaṃ uddisitvā anācāraṃ tāva vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo anācāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyiko vītikkamoti tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Vācasiko vītikkamoti catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ. Kāyikavācasikoti tadubhayaṃ.
这样,就说明了非活命戒的违犯。现在为了说明意门的非行,先说了“一切恶戒都是非行”,然后为了说明其中的某些部分,而说“在此,有人以竹施等”。其中,“以竹施”是指以布施竹子作为促成资具的方式。钵施等也是同样的道理。“竹”是指任何对人类有用的竹竿。“叶”是指用来给香匠等包裹香料的叶子,或者棕榈叶、椰子叶等。“花”是指任何对人类有用的花。果也一样。“沐浴”是指无患子粉等沐浴用的粉末,粘土也算在这里面。“齿木”是指任何用来清洁口腔的齿木。“谄媚”是指把自己放在像奴仆一样的低贱位置,替别人掩饰说错的话,出于想讨人喜欢而说奉承话。“绿豆汤性”是指像绿豆汤一样的状态,也就是靠掺杂虚假来维持生活。就像煮绿豆汤时,很多绿豆煮熟了,少数没煮熟,同样,靠掺杂虚假来维持生活时,虚假的多,真实的少。“他养育”是指养育者,就是照顾别人家孩子的人。养育者的行为叫养育业,那本身就是养育性,这是用装饰等方式照顾良家子弟的名称。为各种在家人,在村落之间、地区之间等传递消息和回信,叫跑腿传信。“以任何一种”是指用这些竹施等,或者用医生的工作、仓库管理的工作、受雇取食的工作、为僧团募供养和建塔等,或者以邪命维持生活的各种工作中,用任何一种。“为佛陀所呵斥”是指被诸佛责备、禁止的。“邪命”是指不是正命。这叫作非行;这一切也都称为非行。行相的解说,应当依照与所说的相反的方式来理解。巴利
Evaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlassa vītikkamo dassito. Idāni mānasaṃ anācāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbampi dussīlyaṃ anācāro’’ti vatvā tattha ekacciyaṃ dassento ‘‘idhekacco veḷudānena vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha veḷudānenāti paccayuppādanatthena veḷudānena. Pattadānādīsupi eseva nayo. Veḷūti manussānaṃ payojanāvaho yo koci veḷudaṇḍo. Pattaṃ gandhikādīnaṃ gandhapaliveṭhanādiatthaṃ vā, tālanāḷikerādipattaṃ vā. Pupphaṃ yaṃ kiñci manussānaṃ payojanāvahaṃ. Tathā phalaṃ. Sinānaṃ sirīsacuṇṇādinhāniyacuṇṇaṃ. Mattikāpi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Dantakaṭṭhaṃ yaṃ kiñci mukhasodhanatthaṃ dantaponaṃ. Cāṭukamyatā attānaṃ dāsaṃ viya nīcaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā parassa khalitavacanaṃ saṇṭhapetvā piyakāmatāya paggayhavacanaṃ. Muggasūpyatāti muggasūpasamatā saccālikena jīvitakappanaṃ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā paccanti, katipayā na paccanti, evaṃ saccālikena jīvitakappane bahu alikaṃ hoti, appakaṃ saccanti. Paribhaṭatīti paribhaṭo, paresaṃ dārake pariharanto. Paribhaṭassa kammaṃ pāribhaṭyaṃ, sā eva pāribhaṭyatā, alaṅkaraṇādinā kuladārakapariharaṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tesaṃ tesaṃ gihīnaṃ gāmantaradesantarādīsu sāsanapaṭisāsanaharaṇaṃ jaṅghapesanikaṃ. Aññataraññatarenāti etesaṃ vā veḷudānādīnaṃ vejjakammabhaṇḍāgārikakammapiṇḍapaṭipiṇḍakammasaṅghuppādacetiyuppādapaṭṭhapanādīnaṃ vā micchājīvena jīvitakappanakakammānaṃ yena kenaci . Buddhapaṭikuṭṭhenāti buddhehi garahitena paṭisiddhena. Micchājīvenāti na sammāājīvena. Ayaṃ vuccati anācāroti ayaṃ sabbopi ‘‘anācāro’’ti kathīyati. Ācāraniddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayeneva veditabbo.
在讲行处时,首先关于非行处的说法,理由应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。行处,是指为了托钵乞食等目的而适合前往的地方。不适合前往的地方就是非行处。妓女是行处,所以叫妓女行处,意思是以结交亲近的方式应当前往的地方。妓女,是指靠容貌谋生的女子。不应当以结交亲近的方式前往她们那里,因为这会障碍出家人的身份,即使对内心清净的人来说也会成为被讥嫌的原因。所以,应当以布施供养的方式,提起正念之后才前往。寡妇,是指丈夫已死或丈夫远行的女子。大龄未婚女,是指年纪大而尚未出嫁的女子。黄门,是指非男非女的人。因为他们烦恼炽盛、内心热恼不得平息,又经常谈论与世俗利益相关的话,所以不应当前往。比丘尼,是指梵行增盛的人。比丘们也是如此。因为彼此是不同性别的对象,如果以亲近交往的方式前往,不出几天就可能成为梵行的障碍,所以不应当前往。如果是以探病等理由前往,就应当保持正念。酒馆,是指卖酒的地方。那里总是离不开嗜酒的人。不应当以嗜酒等理由前往那里,因为这会障碍梵行。在“与国王等混杂而住”等句中,国王,是指统治国家的人。国王的大臣,是指拥有与王权相似的权势地位的人。外道,是指持有颠倒见解的外道游行者。外道弟子,是指对他们有坚定信仰并供养资具的人。以不合宜的交往而住,是指以与三种学处不相随顺、相违背的交往而住,由此导致梵行的障碍或苦行的损减。巴利
Gocaraniddesepi paṭhamaṃ agocarassa vacane kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Gocaroti piṇḍapātādīnaṃ atthāya upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṭṭhānaṃ. Ayuttaṭṭhānaṃ agocaro. Vesiyā gocaro assāti vesiyāgocaro, mittasanthavavasena upasaṅkamitabbaṭṭhānanti attho. Vesiyā nāma rūpūpajīviniyo, tā mittasanthavavasena na upasaṅkamitabbā, samaṇabhāvassa antarāyakarattā, parisuddhāsayassāpi garahahetuto, tasmā dakkhiṇādānavasena satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva upasaṅkamitabbā. Vidhavā vuccanti matapatikā, pavutthapatikā vā. Thullakumārikāti mahallikā aniviṭṭhakumāriyo, paṇḍakāti napuṃsakā. Te hi ussannakilesā avūpasantapariḷāhā lokāmisasannissitakathābahulā, tasmā na upasaṅkamitabbā. Bhikkhuniyo nāma ussannabrahmacariyā. Tathā bhikkhūpi. Tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ visabhāgavatthubhāvato santhavavasena upasaṅkamane katipāheneva brahmacariyantarāyo siyā, tasmā na upasaṅkamitabbā. Gilānapucchanādivasena upasaṅkamane satokārinā bhavitabbaṃ. Pānāgāranti surāpānagharaṃ. Taṃ soṇḍajanehi avivittaṃ hoti. Tattha tehi soṇḍatādivasena na upasaṅkamitabbaṃ brahmacariyantarāyakarattā. Saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhītiādīsu rājāno nāma ye rajjamanusāsanti. Rājamahāmattā rājissariyasadisāya issariyamattāya samannāgatā. Titthiyāti viparītadassanā bāhirakaparibbājakā. Titthiyasāvakāti tesu daḷhabhattā paccayadāyakā. Ananulomikena saṃsaggenāti tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ ananulomikena paccanīkabhūtena saṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho viharati, yena brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā sallekhaparihāniṃ vā pāpuṇāti.
现在,为了用另一种方式说明什么是非行处,所以说了“或者,凡是那些”等话。其中,“无信”是指对佛等没有信心。正因为这样,所以是“不净信”;或者说,因为不信业和业果,所以是“无信”。因为对三宝没有净信,所以是“不净信”。“谩骂、诽谤”是指用骂人的话去骂,又用显示恐怖来吓唬人。他们不想得到利益,只想得到无利,所以是“欲无利”。他们不想得到福祉,只想得到无福,所以是“欲无福”。他们不想得到安乐,只想得到不安乐,所以是“欲不安乐”。他们不想得到远离怖畏的安稳,只想得到不安稳,所以是“欲不安稳”。“比丘们”这句话里,也包括沙弥;“比丘尼们”这句话里,也包括在学尼和沙弥尼。因为这句话是对一切教内之人说明“欲无利益”等的。“像那样的家族”是指那样的刹帝利家族等。“依止”是指依靠而活命。“亲近”是指前往。“敬奉”是指一再地前往。这就叫作:对依止妓女等、国王等、无信家族等的人来说,这三种类型都是不合适的行处,所以是非行处。在这里,妓女等之所以是非行处,是因为依止五种欲乐。正如所说:“比丘们,什么是比丘的非行处、他人之境?就是五种欲乐。”国王等之所以是非行处,是因为不是沙门法的亲依止缘,也是因为成为利养、恭敬、名誉、殴打、压迫、邪见等衰败的原因。无信家族等之所以是非行处,是因为会带来信心减退和内心恐惧。巴利
Idāni aparenapi pariyāyena agocaraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yāni vā pana tānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha assaddhānīti buddhādīsu saddhāvirahitāni. Tato eva appasannāni, kammakammaphalasaddhāya vā abhāvena assaddhāni. Ratanattayappasādābhāvena appasannāni. Akkosakaparibhāsakānīti akkosavatthūhi akkosakāni ceva bhayadassanena santajjanakāni ca. Atthaṃ na icchanti anatthameva icchantīti anatthakāmāni. Hitaṃ na icchanti ahitameva icchantīti ahitakāmāni. Phāsu na icchanti aphāsuṃyeva icchantīti aphāsukakāmāni. Yogakkhemaṃ nibbhayaṃ na icchanti, ayogakkhemameva icchantīti ayogakkhemakāmāni. Bhikkhūnanti ettha sāmaṇerānampi saṅgaho. Bhikkhunīnanti ettha sikkhamānasāmaṇerīnaṃ. Sabbesaṃ hi sāsanikānaṃ anatthakāmatādīpanapadamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathārūpāni kulānīti tādisāni khattiyakulādīni. Sevatīti nissāya jīvati. Bhajatīti upasaṅkamati. Payirupāsatīti punappunaṃ upagacchati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ vesiyādiko, rājādiko, assaddhakulādiko ca taṃ taṃ sevantassa tippakāropi ayutto gocaroti agocaro. Ettha hi vesiyādiko pañcakāmaguṇanissayato agocaro. Yathāha ‘‘ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno agocaro paravisayo? Yadidaṃ pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.372). Rājādiko samaṇadhammassa anupanissayato, lābhasakkārāsanivicakkanippothanadiṭṭhivipattihetuto ca. Assaddhakulādiko saddhāhānicittasantāsāvahato agocaro.
在讲行处时,“不是妓女的行处”等说法,要按它们所说的反面来理解。“成了饮水处”,是说成了水井,就像在十字路口为比丘僧团和比丘尼僧团挖的池塘一样,可以随自己高兴潜入其中。“以袈裟为光”,是说单凭比丘和比丘尼所穿所披的袈裟的光,就使那里一片光明。“仙风逆顺”,是说这些叫作比丘、比丘尼的仙人进出住处时,由衣风以及屈伸身体等所产生的身风,被逆风吹拂,或者已经把罪垢吹散、抖落干净了。巴利
Gocaraniddese ‘‘na vesiyāgocaro’’tiādīni vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbāni. Opānabhūtānīti udapānabhūtāni bhikkhusaṅghassa, bhikkhunīsaṅghassa ca catumahāpathe khatapokkharaṇī viya yathāsukhaṃ ogāhanakkhamāni. Kāsāvapajjotānīti bhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhunīnañca nivatthapārutakāsāvānaṃyeva pabhāhi ekobhāsāni. Isivātapaṭivātānīti gehaṃ pavisantānaṃ , nikkhamantānañca bhikkhubhikkhunīsaṅkhātānaṃ isīnaṃ cīvaravātena ceva samiñjanapasāraṇādijanitasarīravātena ca paṭivātāni pavāyitāni viniddhutakibbisāni vā.
现在,为了也按照释义中已经出现的方式来说明正行和行境,便开始说“再者”等话。这里,“此处”指的是在这巴帝摩卡戒的释义中。“也以这个方法”指的是以现在正要说明的方式。“到僧众中”指进入僧众集会之处。“不表示尊重的人”指没有表现出尊重,也就是没有恭敬的意思。“碰触”指用身体或衣服去摩擦。“站在前面”应与“不表示尊重的人”连起来理解。“即使站着”指就像站在上面一样,即使站在更近的地方也说话。“挥动手臂”指摆动胳膊。“穿鞋”是表示不恭敬的属格用法,指穿着鞋。“挤进长老比丘中间”指进入长老比丘们站立之处后,又走到离他们更近的位置。把木柴丢进火坑里。“绕过”指从旁边越过。“隐蔽的地方”指本来就隐蔽、被布帘或墙等遮住的地方。“不告知”指没有事先打招呼。这些都属于非正行。巴利
Idāni niddese āgatanayenāpi ācāragocare dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ pātimokkhasīlaniddese. Imināpi nayenāti idāni vuccamānavidhināpi. Saṅghagatoti saṅghasannipātaṃ gato. Acittīkārakatoti akatacittīkāro, akatagāravoti attho. Ghaṭṭayantoti sarīrena, cīvarena vā ghaṃsanto. Puratopi tiṭṭhati acittīkārakatoti sambandhitabbaṃ. Ṭhitakopīti upari tiṭṭhanto viya āsannataraṭṭhāne ṭhitakopi bhaṇati. Bāhāvikkhepakoti bāhuṃ vikkhipanto. Anupāhanānanti anādare sāmivacanaṃ. Saupāhanoti upāhanāruḷho. There bhikkhū anupakhajjāti therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ anupavisitvā tesaṃ āsannataraṭṭhānaṃ upagantvā. Kaṭṭhaṃ pakkhipati aggikuṇḍe. Vokkammāti passato atikkamitvā. Gūḷhāni sabhāvato paṭicchannāni sāṇipākārādinā paṭicchāditāni. Anāpucchāti anāpucchitvā. Assāti anācārassa.
另外,“比丘们”等整段话,是就一切比丘的行为表现而说的注释文字,不是释义正文。由信、戒、多闻、布施等功德为因所产生的尊重状态或尊重行为,就是恭敬;和恭敬在一起,就是有恭敬。对于应当尊重的人,因为恭敬、敬畏等而顺从,这叫顺从,也就是具备顺从的行为。和顺从在一起,就是有顺从。由于有殊胜的惭与愧,所以成就了惭与愧。由于圆满受持众学法,所以善着衣、善披衣。“令人净信”,是指能带来净信,这里是表示状态的具格。这一规则在以下六处也是如此。“善前行”,是指以善的方式前行。“成就威仪路”,是指成就威仪路。以此说明其余威仪路也是令人净信的。“在诸根上守护根门”,是指在眼根等六门中善加守护。“于食知量”,是指对于可受用的食物,即四种资具,在寻求、接受、受用等方面完全知量。“勤修警觉”,是指在前夜后夜,以持续不断地实行称为修习作意的警觉,一再勤修,于彼相应而勤修。“具足念与正知”等语,是显示如上所说行为的资粮。其中,“少欲”,就是无贪欲。“知足”,是指以如所得等而知足。“恭敬而作”,是指恭敬而作。“尊重、敬重、多作”,是指对于应尊重者多作尊重。这被称为行为,因为这是欲求利益者所应行持的,所以是行为。巴利
Apica bhikkhūtiādi sabbasseva bhikkhuno ācāradassanavasena pavattaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, na niddesapāḷi. Saddhāsīlasutacāgādiguṇahetuko garubhāvo garukaraṇaṃ vā gāravo, saha gāravenāti sagāravo. Garuṭṭhāniyesu gāravasārajjādivasena paṭissāyanā patissā, sappatissavapaṭipatti. Saha patissāyāti sappatisso. Savisesaṃ hirimanatāya, ottappibhāvena ca hirottappasampanno. Sekhiyadhammapāripūrivasena sunivattho supāruto. Pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Eseva nayo ito paresupi chasu padesu. Abhikkantenāti abhikkamena. Iriyāpathasampannoti sampannairiyāpatho. Tena sesairiyāpathānampi pāsādikatamāha. Indriyesu guttadvāroti cakkhundriyādīsu chasu dvāresu susaṃvihitārakkho. Bhojane mattaññūti paribhuñjitabbato bhojanasaññite catubbidhepi paccaye pariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogādivasena sabbaso pamāṇaññū. Jāgariyamanuyuttoti pubbarattāpararattaṃ bhāvanāmanasikārasaṅkhātaṃ jāgariyaṃ sātaccakāritāvasena anu anu yutto tattha yuttapayutto. Satisampajaññena samannāgatotiādi yathāvuttassa ācārassa sambhāradassanaṃ. Tattha appicchoti niiccho. Santuṭṭhoti yathālābhādivasena santosena tuṭṭho. Sakkaccakārīti ādarakārī. Garucittīkārabahuloti garuṭṭhāniyesu garukaraṇabahulo. Ayaṃ vuccati ācāroti ayaṃ sagāravatādi atthakāmehi ācaritabbato ācāro.
成为戒等功德的亲依止,是亲依止的行境。名为“念”、作为心的防护的,就是行境,即防护行境。名为“业处”、作为心的系缚处的行境,即系缚行境。具足以少欲等十种、以转向远离为依的谈论为事的功德,就是具足十论事功德。正因如此,是善妙的朋友,所以叫善友。他的特相将在后面说到。“未闻”,指契经、应颂等。“听闻”,指生起闻所成智。“净化所闻”,指对因所闻而不清晰、不净的部分,通过反复询问等方式加以净化,使之无杂乱、无纠结。在其中,对属于疑处之法,断除疑惑而度越疑。对业与业果以及三宝,以正见使之正直,就是令见正直。正因如此,也以两种信成就令心净信。或者,依所闻净化法后,在其中把握色与非色法,把握有缘的名色,以破除有情见之曲而令见正直。以唯见诸法之缘与缘生,于三世度越疑。此后,以生灭智等令观增长,进入圣地,以证信令心于三宝净信。正是如此,通过随学那位善友,于信等功德不会减损,唯有增长。因此说“或于谁”等。巴利
Sīlādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ upanissayabhūto upanissayagocaro. Satisaṅkhāto cittassa ārakkhabhūto eva gocaro ārakkhagocaro. Kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāto cittassa upanibandhanaṭṭhānabhūto gocaro upanibandhagocaro. Appicchatādīhi dasahi vivaṭṭanissitāya kathāya vatthubhūtehi guṇehi samannāgato dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato. Tato eva kalyāṇo sundaro mittoti kalyāṇamitto. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ parato āgamissati. Assutaṃ suttageyyādiṃ. Suṇātīti sutamayaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppādeti. Sutaṃ pariyodāpetīti tameva yathāsutaṃ avisadatāya apariyodātaṃ punappunaṃ paripucchanādinā visodheti nijjaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ karoti. Tattha ca ye kaṅkhaṭṭhāniyā dhammā, tesu saṃsayaṃ chindanto kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Kammakammaphalesu, ratanattaye ca sammādiṭṭhiyā ujukaraṇena diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti. Tato eva ca duvidhāyapi saddhāsampadāya cittaṃ pasādeti. Atha vā yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ pariyodapetvā tatthāgate rūpārūpadhamme pariggahetvā sapaccayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ pariggaṇhanto sattadiṭṭhivaṅkavidhamanena diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti. Dhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannatāmattadassanena tīsupi addhāsu kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Tato paraṃ ca udayabbayañāṇādivasena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ariyabhūmiṃ okkamanto aveccapasādena ratanattaye cittaṃ pasādeti. Tathābhūtova tassa kalyāṇamittassa anusikkhanena saddhādīhi guṇehi na hāyati, aññadatthu vaḍḍhateva. Tenāha ‘‘yassa vā’’tiādi.
进入村中,是指在各家各户之间;或者因为这是它的中间家屋,所以得到“中间家屋”这个名字,也就是已经进入作为乞食范围的村子。在那里,他为了挨家挨户寻找食物而走在街道上。垂目,是指眼睛向下看。那么,到什么程度才算是垂目呢?所以说“只看一轭之地”。善防护,是指很好地约束自己。为了说明在这里怎样才算是善防护,才说了“不观看象”等话。巴利
Antaragharanti antare antare gharāni ettha, taṃ etassāti vā ‘‘antaraghara’’nti laddhanāmaṃ gocaragāmaṃ paviṭṭho. Tattha ghare ghare bhikkhāpariyesanāya vīthiṃ paṭipanno. Okkhittacakkhūti heṭṭhākhittacakkhu. Kittakena pana okkhittacakkhu hotīti āha ‘‘yugamattadassāvī’’ti. Susaṃvutoti saṃyato. Yathā panettha susaṃvuto nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na hatthiṃ olokento’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“在哪里”,就是指在哪些念处当中。“心”,是指修习的心。“系缚”,是指引导过来之后绑住。关于这一点,曾经这样说:巴利
Yatthāti yesu satipaṭṭhānesu. Cittaṃ bhāvanācittaṃ. Upanibandhatīti upanetvā nibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
就像有人在这里把一头需要调教的小牛绑在柱子上,
应当这样用正念把自己的心牢牢绑在所缘上。巴利
‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.217; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
为了说明念处是系属于所缘境的,所以说了“vuttañhetaṃ”等这些话。其中,“sako pettiko visayo”的意思是:属于自己的父亲——正自觉者——所有的、由他所见并且由他所开示的境界。巴利
Satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upanibandhagocarabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sako pettiko visayoti attano pitu sammāsambuddhassa santako, tena diṭṭho dassito ca visayo.
在极微细的罪中,就是指在极微细的罪中。在非故意违犯的应学法、不善心生起等类别中,就是指在非故意违犯的应学法、不善心生起等类别中——应当这样理解:这里“非故意”一词是“应学法”的限定语。此处用“应学法”一词,也涵盖了《行仪犍度》等中所说的行仪等内容。因为它们也是应当学的,所以被称为“应学法”。正如在论母中,并没有像对波罗夷等那样对应学法作出界定。这样理解之后,“非故意违犯的应学法”中“非故意”一词就得到了合理解释。因为在论母所列的七十五条应学法中,并没有叫做“无想解脱”的条目,而这里用“非故意”一词,也涵盖了失念和无知的情况。不过有些人在这里说,用“非故意违犯”一词摄取了无心之罪,那只是他们自己的看法,因为在重罪中也有某些无心的情况,而这里所指的,是依止于不共住或依止于发露的最轻微的过失。因此说“那些微小的、轻微的、轻的、被视为轻的”。用“等”字,应当知道摄收了为令巴帝摩卡防护清净而不应违犯、不应成犯之法。“见怖畏戒”是指,把极微小的罪想成高六十八万由旬的须弥山王那样来见,或者把最轻微的恶语想成等同波罗夷那样来见。“凡所有”是指,以根本制、随制、一切处制、方处制等类别,凡应学、应行、应圆满的戒。“正受持”是指真正恭敬地、完全地摄受。那么,这威仪行境的圆满,是摄在巴帝摩卡戒中,还是不摄在其中呢?是摄在其中的。如果是这样,为什么还要再说呢?针对这个质疑,所以说“于此……”等。巴利
Aṇuppamāṇesūti paramāṇuppamāṇesu. Asañciccaāpannasekhiyaakusalacittuppādādibhedesūti asañcicca āpannasekhiyesu akusalacittuppādādibhedesūti evaṃ asañciccaggahaṇaṃ sekhiyavisesanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sekhiyaggahaṇena cettha vattakkhandhakādīsu (cūḷava. 356 ādayo) āgatavattādīnampi gahaṇaṃ. Tepi hi sikkhitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘sekhiyā’’ti icchitā. Tathā hi mātikāyaṃ pārājikādīnaṃ viya sekhiyānaṃ paricchedo na kato. Evañca katvā ‘‘asañcicca āpannasekhiyā’’ti asañciccaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Na hi mātikāyaṃ āgatesu pañcasattatiyā sekhiyesu nosaññāvimokkho nāma atthi, asañciccaggahaṇeneva cettha asatiajānanānampi saṅgaho kato. Keci panettha asiñcicca āpannaggahaṇena acittakāpattiyo gahitāti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ, garukāpattīsupi kāsañci acittakabhāvasabbhāvato, adhiṭṭhānāvikammassa, desanāvikammasseva vā sabbalahukassa vajjassa idhādhippetattā. Tenāha ‘‘yāni tāni vajjāni appamattakāni oramattakāni lahukāni lahusammatānī’’tiādi. Ādisaddena pātimokkhasaṃvaravisuddhatthaṃ anatikkamanīyānaṃ anāpattigamanīyānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Bhayadassanasīloti paramāṇumattaṃ vajjaṃ aṭṭhasaṭṭhiyojanasatasahassubbedhasinerupabbatasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo, sabbalahukaṃ vā dubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo. Yaṃ kiñcīti mūlapaññattianupaññattisabbatthapaññattipadesapaññattiādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci sikkhitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ pūretabbaṃ sīlaṃ. Sammā ādāyāti sammadeva sakkaccaṃ, sabbaso ca ādiyitvā. Ayaṃ pana ācāragocarasampadā kiṃ pātimokkhasīle pariyāpannā, udāhu apariyāpannāti? Pariyāpannā. Yadi evaṃ kasmā puna vuttāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi.
根律仪戒的注释巴利
Indriyasaṃvarasīlavaṇṇanā
15 15. 根律仪戒是巴帝摩卡防护戒的资粮。只有它存在时,才应当被期待,所以说“那位安住在巴帝摩卡防护戒中的比丘”。因为当它成就时,巴帝摩卡防护戒本身就得到了善巧的守护和保护,就像庄稼有妥善设置的荆棘篱笆一样。以因由来说,就是以不共的因由来说。因为以不共的因由来指示结果,就像说“麦芽是鼓声”一样。或者,这是依止的说法,是以依止的惯用语来说,就像说“床在喧哗”一样。“色”指色处。“以眼见色”:在这里,如果眼能见色,那么拥有其他识的有情也应该能见,但事实并非如此,为什么?因为眼是无心的。因此说“眼不见色,因为它是无心的”。如果识能见色,那么它也应该能见到墙等障碍物之后的色,因为识没有对碍,但这也不存在,因为并非一切识都有见的功能。因此说“心不见色,因为没有眼”。其中,只有依止于眼的识才能见,并非任何识都能见。而且,当有墙等障碍物阻断光线时,它便不生起;但在没有阻断的地方,如水晶室、薄壁等,即使有障碍物,它也会生起。如此,以识为依止的眼能见,并非任何都能见。因此,说“以眼见色”是针对以识为依止的眼而说的。巴利
15. Indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlassa sambhārabhūtaṃ, tasmiṃ satiyeva icchitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘soti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhito bhikkhū’’ti. Sampādite hi etasmiṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ suguttaṃ surakkhitameva hoti, susaṃvihitakaṇṭakavati viya sassanti. Kāraṇavasenāti asādhāraṇakāraṇassa vasena. Asādhāraṇakāraṇavasena hi phalaṃ apadisīyati, yathā yavaṅkuro bherisaddoti. Nissayavohārena vā etaṃ nissitavacanaṃ, yathā mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontīti. Rūpanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti ettha yadi cakkhu rūpaṃ passeyya, aññaviññāṇasamaṅginopi passeyyuṃ, na cetaṃ atthi, kasmā? Acetanattā cakkhussa. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhu rūpaṃ na passati acittakattā’’ti. Atha viññāṇaṃ rūpaṃ passeyya, tirokuṭṭādigatampi naṃ passeyya appaṭighabhāvato, idampi natthi sabbassa viññāṇassa dassanābhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘cittaṃ na passati acakkhukattā’’ti. Tattha yathā cakkhusannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃ passati, na yaṃ kiñci. Tañca kenaci kuṭṭādinā antarite na uppajjati, yattha ālokassa vibandho. Yattha pana na vibandho phalikagabbhapaṭalādike, tattha antaritepi uppajjateva. Evaṃ viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ cakkhu passati, na yaṃ kiñcīti viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ cakkhuṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā’’ti.
当根门与所缘接触时,也就是所缘出现在根门面前时,这里说的是眼净色面前出现了色所缘。以净色为依托的心,就是依靠眼净色而生起的识,这称为眼识。看,就是注视。当识依托眼净色时,在光明的帮助下,以所依的功德照亮色所缘,具备这个识的人就被称为“看见色”。而这里的照亮,就是让所缘按照它本来的样子显现出来,这称为“现量地抓取”。就像箭射中靶子时,说是以作为其工具的弓射中的;同样,当识完成了看见色这件事时,说“以眼见色”,这里是“带资具说”,也就是带有资具的言说,意思是带有见之原因的言说。或者,带有资具之见之说为带资具说。‘因此’,即因为仅凭眼或仅凭识皆无见色,所以如此说。巴利
Dvārārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭeti dvārassa ārammaṇena saṅghaṭṭe sati, cakkhussa rūpārammaṇe āpāthagateti adhippāyo. Pasādavatthukena cittenāti cakkhupasādavatthukena tannissāya pavattena viññāṇena, yaṃ ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Passatīti oloketi. Cakkhupasādasannissaye hi viññāṇe ālokānuggahitaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ sannissayaguṇena obhāsente taṃsamaṅgipuggalo ‘‘rūpaṃ passatī’’ti vuccati. Obhāsanañcettha ārammaṇassa yathāsabhāvato vibhāvanaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘paccakkhato gahaṇa’’nti vuccati. Usunā lakkhassa vedhe sijjhante tassa sambhārabhūtena dhanunā vijjhatīti vacanaṃ viya viññāṇena rūpadassane sijjhante cakkhunā rūpaṃ passatīti īdisī sasambhārakathā nāmesā hoti. Sasambhārā kathā sasambhārakathā, dassanassa kāraṇasahitāti attho. Sasambhārassa vā dassanassa kathā sasambhārakathā. Tasmāti yasmā kevalena cakkhunā, kevalena vā viññāṇena rūpadassanaṃ natthi, tasmā.
这里说的“女相”,是指依于女性相续的色身而被执取的形相——比如体态、乳房肌肉的柔嫩、脸上没有胡须、束发的方式、穿衣的方式、走到不显眼的地方去等等。这一切之所以成为认出“女人”的原因,所以叫女相。反过来,应当知道就是男相。这里说的“净相等”,其中能作为贪欲生起原因的可意行相,就是净相。“等”这个字还包括了嗔相等等。应当知道,那能作为嗔恨等生起原因的不合意行相等等,也属于这一类。虽然在经文中只直接提到了贪欲和忧恼,但这里也应当包括舍相,因为以不平等观察的方式,所生起的痴也是一种不防护。正如后面会说“失念或无知”。这里说的舍相,是指成为无智之舍的基础的所缘,这应当理解为因不观察而生起。这样简要来说,贪、嗔、痴的原因,就叫做“净相等”。因此说“作为烦恼基础的相”。只停留在所见本身,就是按照《优陀那》经中所说的“于所见唯是所见”的方式,在色处,以眼识和路心只取所见本身,不再进一步构想任何净等行相。“令明显”,就是令清晰、令显著。因为对于异类所缘,比如手等肢体,如果构想为净等,那么在那里不断生起的烦恼就会变得明显,所以那些被称为它们的“细相”。然而,那些其实是地、所造色这样那样安立的组合行相。因为如果离开这个,在胜义中并没有所谓的手等东西。因此说“不取手、脚……行相”。那取什么呢?回答说“那里什么是大种,就取那个”。在那个身体中存在的,比如头发、体毛等,只是大种与所造色,就如实取那个。为了说明那里取不净行相的例子,举出了“住在塔山”等大提舍长老的故事。巴利
Itthipurisanimittaṃ vāti ettha itthisantānanissitarūpamukhena gayhamānaṃ saṇṭhānaṃ thanamaṃsāvisadatā nimmassumukhatā kesabandhanavatthaggahaṇaṃ avisadaṭṭhānagamanādi ca sabbaṃ ‘‘itthī’’ti sañjānanassa kāraṇabhāvato itthinimittaṃ. Vuttavipariyāyato purisanimittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Subhanimittādikaṃ vāti ettha rāguppattihetubhūto iṭṭhākāro subhanimittaṃ. Ādi-saddena paṭighanimittādīnaṃ saṅgaho. So pana dosuppattiādihetubhūto aniṭṭhādiākāro veditabbo. Kāmañcettha pāḷiyaṃ abhijjhādomanassāva sarūpato āgatā, upekkhānimittassāpi pana saṅgaho icchitabbo, asamapekkhanena uppajjanakamohassāpi asaṃvarabhāvato. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘muṭṭhasaccaṃ vā aññāṇaṃ vā’’ti. Upekkhānimittanti cettha aññāṇupekkhāya vatthubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, tañcassa asamapekkhanavasena veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkhepato rāgadosamohānaṃ kāraṇaṃ ‘‘subhanimittādika’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kilesavatthubhūtaṃ nimitta’’nti. Diṭṭhamatteyeva saṇṭhātīti ‘‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti (udā. 10) sutte vuttanayena vaṇṇāyatane cakkhuviññāṇena, vīthicittehi ca gahitamatteyeva tiṭṭhati, na tato paraṃ kiñci subhādiākāraṃ parikappeti. Pākaṭabhāvakaraṇatoti paribyattabhāvakaraṇato vibhūtabhāvakaraṇato. Visabhāgavatthuno hi hatthādiavayavesu subhādito parikappentassa aparāparaṃ tattha uppajjamānā kilesā paribyattā hontīti te tesaṃ anubyañjanā nāma. Te pana yasmā tathā tathā sanniviṭṭhānaṃ bhūtupādāyarūpānaṃ sannivesākāro. Na hi taṃ muñcitvā paramatthato hatthādi nāma koci atthi. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘hatthapāda…pe… ākāraṃ na gaṇhātī’’ti. Kiṃ pana gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘yaṃ tattha bhūtaṃ, tadeva gaṇhātī’’ti. Yaṃ tasmiṃ sarīre vijjamānaṃ kesalomādi bhūtupādāyamattaṃ vā, tadeva yāthāvato gaṇhāti. Tattha asubhākāragahaṇassa nidassanaṃ dassento ‘‘cetiyapabbatavāsī’’tiādinā mahātissattheravatthuṃ āhari.
在这其中,“善加装饰与庄严”就是很好地装饰、打扮。用璎珞等身外之物来装饰,叫装饰;以涂油按摩等方式修整身体,叫打扮;而用璎珞、衣服饰品等来装扮,也叫打扮。把欠缺的地方补足,叫装饰。“心颠倒”就是因贪欲而心颠倒。“观察”是说长老正以业处作意而行走,因为笑声像刺一样干扰了前行作意,他就顺着笑声想“这是什么?”而观察。“不净想”就是骨想,因为长老那时正修习骨业处。“证得阿拉汉果”:据说,长老仅仅因为看见那女人笑时露出的牙齿,由于前行修习已经善修,获得了似相和殊胜的近行定,就站在原地证得初禅,以此为基础,增长观智,次第修道,最终漏尽解脱。“忆念先前之想”就是忆念、作意先前所修、时时修习的骨业处。“随路”就是随其足迹。据说,由于长老修习纯熟,仅仅因为看见牙齿,那女人的全身就显现为骨聚之相。他不认为那是“女人”或“男人”。因此说:“我不知……在大道上。”巴利
Tattha sumaṇḍitapasādhitāti suṭṭhu maṇḍitā pasādhitā ca. Ābharaṇādīhi āhārimehi maṇḍanaṃ. Sarīrassa ucchādanādivasena paṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ pasādhananti vadanti, ābharaṇehi, pana vatthālaṅkārādīhi ca alaṅkaraṇaṃ pasādhanaṃ. Ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ maṇḍanaṃ. Vipallatthacittāti rāgavasena viparītacittā. Olokentoti thero kammaṭṭhānamanasikāreneva gacchanto saddakaṇṭakattā pubbabhāgamanasikārassa hasitasaddānusārena ‘‘kimeta’’nti olokento. Asubhasaññanti aṭṭhikasaññaṃ. Aṭṭhikakammaṭṭhānaṃ hi thero tadā pariharati. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti thero kira tassā hasantiyā dantaṭṭhidassaneneva pubbabhāgabhāvanāya subhāvitattā paṭibhāganimittaṃ, sātisayañca upacārajjhānaṃ labhitvā yathāṭhitova tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ adhigantvā taṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggaparamparāya āsavakkhayaṃ pāpuṇi. Pubbasaññaṃ anussarīti pubbakaṃ yathāraddhaṃ kālena kālaṃ anuyuñjiyamānaṃ aṭṭhikakammaṭṭhānaṃ anussari samannāhari. Anumagganti anupathaṃ tassā padānupadaṃ. Therassa kira bhāvanāya paguṇabhāvato dantaṭṭhidassaneneva tassā sakalasarīraṃ aṭṭhikasaṅghātabhāvena upaṭṭhāsi. Na taṃ ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā sañjāni. Tenāha ‘‘nābhijānāmi…pe… mahāpathe’’ti.
说了“若以眼根不防护为因”之后,又说“为了用念之门关闭那个眼根”,这是就防护而说的,不是就不防护说的。也就是说,这里所显示的贪欲等随流,虽然说是以眼根不防护为因,实际上是在显示:它是以未防护的眼根为因而生起的。因为对于以眼门为通道的贪欲等随流来说,眼根就像该门通道的识一样,是主要的原因。当眼根未防护时,它们就随之流漏,所以“以未防护的眼根为因的不防护”就是这样说的。“缘彼故”的意思就是:以那个眼根为原因。以什么样的眼根为原因呢?未防护的。什么是未防护呢?如果由于眼根的不防护,贪欲等随流随之流漏,那就是为了防护它。这就是这里的意思关联。巴利
‘‘Yassa cakkhundriyāsaṃvarassa hetū’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘tassa cakkhundriyassa satikavāṭena pidahanatthāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, na asaṃvarassāti. Yadidaṃ yaṃ cakkhundriyāsaṃvarassa hetu abhijjhādianvāssavanaṃ dassitaṃ, taṃ asaṃvutacakkhundriyasseva hetu pavattaṃ dassitanti katvā vuttaṃ. Cakkhudvārikassa hi abhijjhādianvāssavanassa taṃdvārikaviññāṇassa viya cakkhundriyaṃ padhānakāraṇaṃ. Cakkhundriyassa asaṃvutatte sati te anvāssavantīti asaṃvariyamānacakkhundriyahetuko so asaṃvaro tathā vuttoti. Yatvādhikaraṇanti hi yassa cakkhundriyassa kāraṇāti attho. Kīdisassa ca kāraṇāti? Asaṃvutassa, kiñca asaṃvutaṃ? Yassa cakkhundriyāsaṃvarassa hetu abhijjhādayo anvāssavanti, tassa saṃvarāyāti ayamettha yojanā.
在速行刹那,如果“恶行”等(在此处)不再重复说明,那么这一切就在这里已经说过了,应当知道在六门中是随其可能而说的。因为在五门中,并不存在被称为身恶行和语恶行的恶行,所以对恶行的不防护应当依意门来理解,其余的不防护则应当依六门来理解。因为失念等法属于与念对立的不善法之类,所以可能在五门中生起,但作为身语违犯的恶行则不可能在那里生起,因为五门速行不能产生无表色。在这里,恶行等五种不防护,是作为戒防护等五种防护的对立面而说的。于彼存在时,就是说当那种不防护存在时。巴利
Javanakkhaṇe pana sace dussīlyaṃ vātiādi puna avacanatthaṃ idheva sabbaṃ vuttanti chasu dvāresu yathāsambhavaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na hi pañcadvāre kāyavacīduccaritasaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ atthi, tasmā dussīlyāsaṃvaro manodvāravasena, sesāsaṃvaro chadvāravasena yojetabbo. Muṭṭhasaccādīnaṃ hi satipaṭipakkhākusaladhammādibhāvato siyā pañcadvāre uppatti, na tveva kāyikavācasikavītikkamabhūtassa dussīlyassa tattha uppatti, pañcadvārikajavanānaṃ aviññattijanakattā. Dussīlyādayo cettha pañca asaṃvarā sīlasaṃvarādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ saṃvarānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvena vuttā. Tasmiṃ satīti tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati.
“以何种方式”的意思是:速行生起时的无防护,为什么被称为“眼根的无防护”?这个譬喻到底想说明什么?通过“如同”等词,说明的是:就像城门没有防护时,与城门相关的房屋等也就没有防护;同样,速行没有防护时,与速行相关的门等也就没有防护。这样只是以“一者无防护,另一者也无防护”这种一般性的相似来作譬喻,并不是前后之间的相似,也不是内外之间的相似。或者也可以这样理解:把再次生起的速行视为如同外在,说为如同城门,其余的则如同城内的房屋等。因为从缘的角度来说,先前已经成就的,在速行时虽然不存在,但有分等就像眼等一样,对于果的成就而言,仍然可以说是存在的。并不是只有持续存在的才被称为“存在”。说“视为如同外在”,是从究竟意义上说,速行并没有外在性,其余也没有内在性;但依据“比丘们,此心是极光净的,然而被客尘烦恼所染污”等说法,作为客尘、时而生起的速行,以一种方式可以说有外在性,而与之性质相异的其余则有内在性,所以才这样说。或者,当速行中生起无防护时,此后门、有分等就成为无防护的因。因为无防护生起时,门、有分等就显现为它的因。以如同城门的速行进入后,戒坏等盗贼在门、有分等处进行掠夺、毁坏善法之财宝,这个意思已经说过了。因为无防护在哪一门生起,它就在那里断除门等的防护亲依止而转起。门、有分等与速行的关联,应当视为同属一相续。巴利
Yathākinti yena pakārena javane uppajjamāno asaṃvaro ‘‘cakkhundriye asaṃvaro’’ti vuccati, taṃ nidassanaṃ kinti attho. Yathātiādinā nagaradvāre asaṃvare sati taṃsambandhānaṃ gharādīnaṃ asaṃvutatā viya javane asaṃvare sati taṃsambandhānaṃ dvārādīnaṃ asaṃvutatāti evaṃ aññāsaṃvare aññāsaṃvutatā sāmaññameva nidasseti, na pubbāparasāmaññaṃ, antobahisāmaññaṃ vā. Sati vā dvārabhavaṅgādike puna uppajjamānaṃ javanaṃ bāhiraṃ viya katvā nagaradvārasamānaṃ vuttaṃ , itarañca antonagare gharādisamānaṃ. Paccayabhāvena hi purimanipphannaṃ javanakāle asantampi bhavaṅgādi cakkhādi viya phalanipphattiyā santaṃyeva nāma hoti. Na hi dharamānaṃyeva ‘‘santa’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Bāhiraṃ viya katvā’’ti ca paramatthato javanassa bāhirabhāve, itarassa ca abbhantarabhāve asatipi ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkiliṭṭha’’ntiādi (a. ni. 1.49) vacanato āgantukabhūtassa kadāci kadāci uppajjamānassa javanassa bāhirabhāvo, tabbidhurasabhāvassa itarassa abbhantarabhāvo ekena pariyāyena hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Javane vā asaṃvare uppanne tato paraṃ dvārabhavaṅgādīnaṃ asaṃvarahetubhāvāpattito. Asaṃvarassa hi uppattiyā dvārabhavaṅgādīnaṃ tassa hetubhāvo paññāyatīti. Nagaradvārasadisena javanena pavisitvā dussīlyādicorānaṃ dvārabhavaṅgādīsu musanaṃ kusalabhaṇḍavināsanaṃ kathitaṃ. Yasmiṃ hi dvāre asaṃvaro uppajjati, so tattha dvārādīnaṃ saṃvarūpanissayabhāvaṃ upacchindantoyeva pavattatīti. Dvārabhavaṅgādīnaṃ javanena saha sambandho ekasantatipariyāpannato daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,当色所缘出现在眼门时,经过确定等作用,善或不善的速行生起七次后,就沉入有分;然后,与那情况相应的意门速行,只对同一个所缘生起七次后,又沉入有分;接着,还是在同一个门,依靠同一个所缘,以“女人、男人”等方式加以判定,并因为对净色的染着等,速行又运行七次。针对这样运行的速行,才说“当速行中生起破戒等时,若没有防护,那么门也没有守护”等等。巴利
Ettha ca cakkhudvāre rūpārammaṇe āpāthagate niyamitādivasena kusalākusalajavane sattakkhattuṃ uppajjitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇe tadanurūpameva manodvārikajavane tasmiṃyevārammaṇe sattakkhattuṃyeva uppajjitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇe puna tasmiṃyeva dvāre tadevārammaṇaṃ nissāya ‘‘itthī puriso’’tiādinā vavatthapentaṃ pasādarajjanādivasena sattakkhattuṃ javanaṃ javati. Evaṃ pavattamānaṃ javanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi agutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
在那速行心中,说到“戒等”,是指戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护已经生起的时候。就像一个人事先没有建立起念的守护,毁戒等就会生起;同样,事先建立起了念的守护,就该知道戒等会生起。在声音等所缘上,也应当按各自的情况理解相和随相。因为,用耳识听到声音后,不执取“这是女人的声音”或“这是男人的声音”,也不执取可意、不可意等会成为烦恼依据的相,只停留在“听到了”而已。至于在歌声等地方,随烦恼之逐次表相而行,所以叫“随相”,也就是按迟钝等标准来区分、分为六种等不同形态的行相,他也不执取。香等所缘也应照此按情况来说。在意门方面,则是有转向的有分,意门就是那个门,当法所缘出现在那门时,应当用“以那个速行心识知、了知之后”等来连接说明。烦恼跟随着这个人,所以叫“烦恼随行”,那也就是执取相等等;因此,以回避烦恼随行的执取相等等为特征,就是回避烦恼随行相执取等的特征。“等”这个字包含了随相。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana javane. Sīlādīsūti sīlasaṃvarasatisaṃvarañāṇasaṃvarakhantisaṃvaravīriyasaṃvaresu uppannesu. Yathā hi pageva satiārakkhaṃ anupaṭṭhapentassa dussīlyādīnaṃ uppatti, evaṃ pageva satiārakkhaṃ upaṭṭhapentassa sīlādīnaṃ uppatti veditabbā. Saddādīsupi yathārahaṃ nimittānubyañjanāni veditabbāni. Sotaviññāṇena hi saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘itthisaddo’’ti vā ‘‘purisasaddo’’ti vā iṭṭhāniṭṭhādikaṃ vā kilesavatthubhūtaṃ nimittaṃ na gaṇhāti, sutamatte eva saṇṭhāti. Yo ca gītasaddādikassa kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato ‘‘anubyañjana’’nti laddhavohāro mandatārādivasena vavatthito chajjādibhedabhinno ākāro, tampi na gaṇhātīti. Evaṃ gandhādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Manodvāre pana sāvajjanabhavaṅgaṃ manodvāraṃ tasmiṃ dvāre dhammārammaṇe āpāthagate taṃ javanamanasāva viññāya vijānitvātiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Kileso anubandho etassāti kilesānubandho, so eva nimittādigāho, tato parivajjanalakkhaṇaṃ kilesānubandhanimittādiggāhaparivajjanalakkhaṇaṃ. Ādi-saddena anubyañjanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
活命遍净戒的注释巴利
Ājīvapārisuddhisīlavaṇṇanā
16 这里说的,就是指前面按纲目方式已经讲过的内容。也就是说,先摘出“以活命为因而制定的六条学处”这句话,然后为了直接按经文本身来显示它们,就开始说了“那些……”等话。其中,“那些如此制定的六条学处”是前后连接的意思。“以活命为因”,就是以谋生为原因,心里想的是“这样我就能不因为资具而辛苦地活下去”。“以活命为缘故”是同一个意思的另一种说法。“恶欲者”,就是具有邪恶欲望、想让别人相信自己有实际上并不存在的功德。“为欲所败”,就是被欲望打败、被欲望折磨,或者被欲望控制。“不存在”,就是没有。“非真实”,就是没有生起。因为没有生起,所以它是不存在的,后一句是在说明前一句的原因。“上人法”,就是上人、殊胜之人的法,或者比人法更高、更殊胜的法。“夸大”,就是抬高自己而说。因为戒是比丘的寿命,当他这样夸说的时候,他的戒就在同一时刻消失了。所以说“犯波罗夷罪”,意思是他有名为波罗夷的罪,或者违犯名为波罗夷的过失,也就是夸大的意思。“作媒”,就是从事撮合的行为,意思是把女人的心意告诉男人,或者把男人的心意告诉女人。“依这六条学处的违犯”这个连接关系,前面已经说过了。巴利
16.Vutteti idheva uddesavasena pubbe vutte. Tathā hi ‘‘ājīvahetu paññattānaṃ channaṃ sikkhāpadāna’’nti paduddhāraṃ katvā tāni pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘yāni tānī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yāni tāni evaṃ paññattāni cha sikkhāpadānīti sambandho. Ājīvahetūti jīvikanimittaṃ, ‘‘evāhaṃ paccayehi akilamanto jīvissāmī’’ti adhippāyena. Ājīvakāraṇāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pāpicchoti pāpikāya asantaguṇasambhāvanicchāya samannāgato. Icchāpakatoti icchāya apakato upadduto, abhibhūto vā. Asantanti avijjamānaṃ. Abhūtanti anuppannaṃ. Anuppannattā hi tassa taṃ asantanti purimassa pacchimaṃ kāraṇavacanaṃ. Uttarimanussadhammanti uttarimanussānaṃ ukkaṭṭhapurisānaṃ dhammaṃ, manussadhammato vā uttari ukkaṭṭhaṃ. Ullapatīti uggatāyuko lapati. Sīlaṃ hi bhikkhuno āyu, taṃ tassa tathālapanasamakālameva vigacchati. Tenāha ‘‘āpatti pārājikassā’’ti pārājikasaṅkhātā āpatti assa, pārājikasaññitassa vā vītikkamassa āpajjanaṃ ullapananti attho. Sañcarittaṃ samāpajjatīti sañcaraṇabhāvaṃ āpajjati, itthiyā vā purisamatiṃ, purisassa vā itthimatiṃ ārocetīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Imesaṃ channaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ vītikkamassa vasenā’’ti sambandho heṭṭhā dassito eva.
“诡诈等”这些词,是对下面所列经文的逐词提取。这里说的“此经”,是指《分别论》(Vibha. 861)中出现的解说经文。巴利
Kuhanātiādīsūti heṭṭhā uddiṭṭhapāḷiyāva paduddhāro. Ayaṃ pāḷīti ayaṃ vibhaṅge (vibha. 861) āgatā niddesapāḷi.
17 因衣服等资具而得到的东西,就是利养。同样这些东西,因为是以恭敬、尊重的态度布施出去的,所以叫恭敬。名声远播,就是称誉。那就是利养、恭敬和称誉。在“依止者”这句里,指的是渴爱的依止,所以说“渴望者”。“想显示不存在的功德的人”,是指想把自身并不存在的信等功德让人相信。因为恶欲的特征就是让人相信自己没有的功德,并且在接受东西时不知节制。“被欲望败坏的人”,是指被恶欲败坏,偏离了正命而行事,所以叫败坏。这样的人又被谋生的困境所困扰,所以说“被困扰者的意思就是这样”。巴利
17. Cīvarādipaccayā labbhantīti lābhā. Te eva sakkaccaṃ ādaravasena diyyamānā sakkārā. Patthaṭayasatā kittisaddo. Taṃ lābhañca sakkārañca kittisaddañca. Sannissitassāti ettha taṇhānissayo adhippetoti āha ‘‘patthayantassā’’ti. Asantaguṇadīpanakāmassāti asante attani avijjamāne saddhādiguṇe sambhāvetukāmassa. Asantaguṇasambhāvanatālakkhaṇā, paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutālakkhaṇā hi pāpicchatā. Icchāya apakatassāti pāpikāya icchāya sammāājīvato apeto katoti apakato. Tathābhūto ca ājīvūpaddavena upaddutoti katvā āha ‘‘upaddutassāti attho’’ti.
诡诈本身就是产生资具的依托,所以叫诡诈所依。这里说的三种诡诈,是依据这部经来显示的,应当这样理解它的意思。对有需要的人:就是对衣服等有需要的人。以拒绝:就是以拒绝衣服等为理由。会是:就是可能会有。以及以接受:用“以及”这个词,把前面所说的拒绝一并包括进来。巴利
Kuhanameva paccayuppādanassa vatthūti kuhanavatthu. Tividhampetaṃ tattha āgataṃ tassa nissayabhūtāya imāya pāḷiyā dassetunti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Tadatthikassevāti tehi cīvarādīhi atthikasseva. Paṭikkhipanenāti cīvarādīnaṃ paṭikkhipanahetu. Assāti bhaveyya. Paṭiggahaṇena cāti ca-saddena pubbe vuttaṃ paṭikkhipanaṃ samuccinoti.
“更欲”就是多欲。“而”是对行为的执取,因此,“应持”在这里指的是把僧伽梨衣做成后受持,这适宜沙门,应当这样连接理解。“商贩所弃”指从店铺里丢弃出来的。“布片”指散落消失的破布片。“捡集后”指通过拾捡而收集、聚拢起来。“以乞食行”指以乞食行所得之物。作为病者所需条件的、名为药的活命资具,就是病者所需的药物活命资具。“腐尿”是一切陈旧和不陈旧牛尿的名称。“以腐尿”指用因腐坏而被别人丢弃的尿,或变成腐败的牛尿。“头陀说者”是对他人亦宣说头陀功德者。“现前”即由现前存在、可得之意。巴利
Bhiyyokamyatanti bahukāmataṃ. Yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dhāreyyā’’ti ettha yadetaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhāraṇaṃ, etaṃ samaṇassa sāruppanti yojanā. Pāpaṇikānīti āpaṇato chaḍḍitāni. Nantakānīti antarahitāni coḷakhaṇḍāni. Uccinitvāti uñchanena cinitvā saṅgahetvā. Uñchācariyāyāti uñchācariyāya laddhena. Gilānassa paccayabhūtā bhesajjasaṅkhātā jīvitaparikkhārā gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā. Pūtimuttanti purāṇassa, apurāṇassa ca sabbassa gomuttassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pūtimuttenāti pūtibhāvena muttena parehi chaḍḍitena, pūtibhūtena vā gomuttena. Dhutavādoti paresampi dhutaguṇavādī. Sammukhībhāvāti sammukhato vijjamānattā, labbhamānatāyāti attho.
把我自己放在接近证得上人法这件事的旁边,然后开口说话,这就是“近边说”。“大威德”就是有大威力,意思是说通过证得上人法而有的。“朋友”是先按一般说法讲,然后再用“见过面的、结为亲密之交的”来进一步区分。只是见过一面的人,就叫见过面的朋友;关系牢固、情谊深厚的人,就叫亲密之交。“同伴”就是一起同行的人,意思是朋友。因为一起走过七步的人,就被称为“朋友”。精舍是用围墙围起来的整个住处。半圆屋是长形的殿堂,也有人说是金翅鸟形状的殿堂。殿堂是四方形的殿堂。覆屋是平顶的殿堂。尖顶屋是用两根屋脊饰建成的殿堂。望楼是能抵挡敌方国王、有四五层高的特殊住所。圆屋是只有一个尖顶、有很多角的特殊住所。长屋是没有内室、只有一扇门的长厅,有人这样说。另一些人则说:精舍是长面殿堂。半圆屋是一边有顶盖的坐卧处。据说它一边的墙比较高,另一边比较低,所以是一边有顶盖的。殿堂是长方形的四角殿堂。覆屋是平顶、带有月光露台的。窟就是纯粹的山洞。岩洞是有门的。尖顶屋是任何一种用屋脊饰连接起来的殿堂。望楼是厚墙的房子,它的椽子不受力,只用砖来盖顶。也有人说它是按塔楼的形式建造的。圆屋是圆形建造的坐卧处。长屋是一种特殊的住所,也被称为“货物厅、敞棚”。集会堂就是集会的地方。巴利
Attānaṃ uttarimanussadhammādhigamassa sāmante katvā jappanaṃ sāmantajappanaṃ. Mahesakkhoti mahānubhāvo, uttarimanussadhammādhigamenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Mitto’’ti sāmaññato vatvā puna taṃ viseseti ‘‘sandiṭṭho sambhatto’’ti . Diṭṭhamatto hi mitto sandiṭṭho. Daḷhabhattiko sambhatto. Sahāyoti saha āyanako, sakhāti attho. Sattapadino hi ‘‘sakhā’’ti vuccanti. Vihāro pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. Aḍḍhayogo dīghapāsādo, garuḷasaṇṭhānapāsādotipi vadanti. Pāsādo caturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Kūṭāgāraṃ dvīhi kaṇṇikāhi kattabbapāsādo. Aṭṭo paṭirājūnampi paṭibāhanayogyo catupañcabhūmako paṭissayaviseso. Māḷo ekakūṭasaṅgahito anekakoṇavanto paṭissayaviseso. Uddaṇḍo agabbhikā ekadvārā dīghasālāti vadanti. Apare pana bhaṇanti – vihāro nāma dīghamukhapāsādo. Aḍḍhayogo ekapassena chadanakasenāsanaṃ. Tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekapassachadanakaṃ hoti. Pāsādo āyatacaturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanaṃ candikaṅgaṇayuttaṃ. Guhā kevalā pabbataguhā. Leṇaṃ dvārabaddhaṃ. Kūṭāgāraṃ yo koci kaṇṇikābaddhapāsādo. Aṭṭo bahalabhittigehaṃ. Yassa gopānasiyo aggahetvā iṭṭhakāhi eva chadanaṃ hoti. Aṭṭālakākārena karīyatītipi vadanti. Māḷo vaṭṭākārena katasenāsanaṃ. Uddaṇḍo eko paṭissayaviseso. Yo ‘‘bhaṇḍasālā, udosita’’ntipi vuccati. Upaṭṭhānasālā sannipatanaṭṭhānaṃ.
以成为卑劣之尘的恶欲,毫无意义地压制身语的躁动,这就是卑劣行;他有这个,所以是卑劣行者;以欺诈约束身体,极度地、或频繁地做卑劣行者,就是极卑劣行者。有些人说是过度猜疑者。极度诈现的人就是极诈现者,意思是极度令人诧异。极度饶舌的人就是极饶舌者。以面自显的人,就是通过极卑劣行者等状态所生起的言语,仅凭自己的面容就让别人认为自己有某种特质。他就是这样,以这样的状态,把自己当成别人一样,说出“这是沙门”等话。“深奥”等,是就他的言语与上人法相关联而说的。巴利
Kucchitarajabhūtāya pāpicchatāya niratthakaṃ kāyavacīvipphandaniggaṇhanaṃ korajaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti korajiko, kohaññena saṃyatakāyo, ativiya, abhiṇhaṃ vā korajiko korajikakorajiko. Atiparisaṅkitoti keci. Ativiya kuho kuhakakuhako, sātisayavimhāpakoti attho. Ativiya lapo lapanako lapakalapako. Mukhasambhāvikoti korajikakorajikādibhāvena pavattavacanehi attano mukhamattena aññehi sambhāviko. So evarūpo evarūpatāya eva attānaṃ paraṃ viya katvā ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo’’tiādīni katheti. Gambhīrantiādi tassā kathāya uttarimanussadhammapaṭibaddhatāya vuttaṃ.
怀着想让别人高看自己的意图而做:心里盘算着“人们怎样才能把我看成‘圣洁者’或者‘获得殊胜成就的人’”,带着这种意图去做。“安立行走”:就像那些获得殊胜成就的人的走法一样,郑重地摆出自己的步态,好像一个具足正念正知的人在行走。“发愿之后”:心里定下“愿他们知道我是阿拉汉”,或者生起这样的渴求。“像入定的人一样”:就像通过禅那入定的人那样。“在众人眼前入禅者”:在人们看得到的地方,摆出入定的坐姿,在众人显现之处入禅。“名为威仪”:名为安立威仪。巴利
Sambhāvanādhippāyakatenāti ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho maṃ jano ‘ariyo’ti vā ‘visesalābhī’ti vā sambhāveyyā’’ti iminā adhippāyena katena. Gamanaṃ saṇṭhapetīti visesalābhīnaṃ gamanaṃ viya attano gamanaṃ sakkaccaṃ ṭhapeti , sato sampajānova gacchanto viya hoti. Paṇidhāyāti ‘‘arahāti maṃ jānantū’’ti cittaṃ saṇṭhapetvā, patthetvā vā. Samāhito viyāti jhānasamādhinā samāhito viya. Āpāthakajjhāyīti manussānaṃ āpāthaṭṭhāne samādhisamāpanno viya nisīdanto āpāthake janassa pākaṭaṭṭhāne jhāyī. Iriyāpathasaṅkhātanti iriyāpathasaṇṭhapanasaṅkhātaṃ.
所谓“以受用资具为名”,就是指以不如理的方式所产生的资具的受用,这样来称呼;或者是以那种资具的受用为应当称呼、应当言说的。“装作别人之后,在自己近旁说话”,就是装成旁人的样子,在自己身边说话,这叫近旁低语。把ā音缩短,说成“安立”。欺骗就是诈,它的运作、活动就是诈现活动;或者诈者这个人的活动、行为、动作就是诈现活动。以诈而行,或者因诈而如此的人,就是诈者、诈现者。巴利
Paccayapaṭisevanasaṅkhātenāti ayoniso uppāditānaṃ paccayānaṃ paṭisevananti evaṃ kathitena, tena vā paccayapaṭisevanena saṅkhātabbena kathitabbena. Aññaṃ viya katvā attano samīpe bhaṇanaṃ sāmantajappitaṃ. Ā-kārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘aṭṭhapanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kuhanaṃ kuho, tassa ayanā pavatti kuhāyanā, kuhassa vā puggalassa ayanā gati kiriyā kuhāyanā. Kuheti, kuhena vā itoti kuhito, kuhako.
被问者:就是被问“谁是帝须?谁是国王所敬奉的人?”者。抬高之后:就是举起来之后,借由财富成就等来抬举。巴利
Puṭṭhassāti ‘‘ko tisso, ko rājapūjito’’ti puṭṭhassa. Uddhaṃ katvāti ukkhipitvā vibhavasampattiādinā paggahetvā.
“向上缠缚”是指一层又一层地往上捆绑、缠绕。据说有两个比丘进了一个村子,坐在集会堂里,叫来一个少女。她来了以后,其中一人问另一人:“尊者,这少女是谁家的?”那人就绕着弯子说:“是我们护持者的女儿,叫油罐女。她母亲在我到她家去的时候,用罐子给酥油,这少女也像她母亲一样用罐子给。”针对这件事,所以说“这里应当讲油罐女的故事”。巴利
Unnahanāti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ bandhanā paliveṭhanā. Dve kira bhikkhū ekaṃ gāmaṃ pavisitvā āsanasālāya nisīditvā ekaṃ kumārikaṃ pakkosiṃsu. Tāya āgatāya tatreko ekaṃ pucchi ‘‘ayaṃ, bhante, kassa kumārikā’’ti? ‘‘Amhākaṃ upaṭṭhāyikāya telakandarikāya dhītā, imissā mātā mayi gehaṃ gate sappiṃ dadamānā ghaṭeneva deti, ayampi mātā viya ghaṭena detī’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 862) ukkācesi. Imaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘telakandarikavatthu cettha vattabba’’nti.
“随法相称”是指与字面的说法相称。因为字面的说法就叫做“法”。正如所说:“善人称善说为最上,说法而非非法,这是第二种。”(《相应部》1.213;《经集》452)因此,他说了许多杂乱的话;或者应当知道,真实的或其他善说的话语就是“法”。行为像绿豆汤的人,就是“绿豆汤者”。因此他说:“这个人称为绿豆汤者。”受雇者的行为是受雇,这就是受雇性。巴利
Dhammānurūpā vāti mattāvacanānurūpaṃ vā. Mattāvacanaṃ hi ‘‘dhammo’’ti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘subhāsitaṃ uttamamāhu santo, dhammaṃ bhaṇe nādhammaṃ taṃ dutiya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.213; su. ni. 452). Tena bahuṃ vippalapanamāha, saccato vā aññā subhāsitā vācā ‘‘dhammo’’ti veditabbo. Muggasūpasadisakammo puggalo muggasūpyo. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo muggasūpyoti vuccatī’’ti. Paribhaṭassa kammaṃ pāribhaṭyaṃ, tadeva pāribhaṭyatā.
以相而行的人,或者靠相活命的人,就是依相者,这种状态就是依相性。把自己的欲望显露出来,就是炫耀。那什么是“闻”呢?就是“今天比丘们的资具很难得到”这类跟资具相关的话。在想要的东西附近谈论,就是近谈。巴利
Nimittena caranto, jīvanto vā nimittako, tassa bhāvo nemittikatā. Attano icchāya pakāsanaṃ obhāso. Ko pana soti ? ‘‘Ajja bhikkhūnaṃ paccayā dullabhā jātā’’tiādikā paccayapaṭisaṃyuttakathā. Icchitavatthussa samīpe kathanaṃ sāmantajappā.
即使因为害怕被骂才布施,也仍然算是用十种骂人的事在骂人。轻蔑之类的情况也是这样。忽视,是因为把他们从施主等身份中抛开。“Khipanā”就是轻贱的话;不过那种话是带着嘲笑说的,所以又说成“嘲弄”。“Pāpanā”就是把某人说成不是施主,或者把恶名安到他身上。习惯吃别人背后肉的人,就是背后嚼肉者;这种习性就叫背后嚼肉性。“Abbhaṅga”就是涂香。就像要捏碎之后才能找到香气——没捏碎就得不到香,捏碎了才得到香——同样,不“捏碎”别人的功德,就得不到资具;通过“捏碎”而得到资具,应当这样理解。巴利
Akkosanabhayenāpi dadeyyāti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosanaṃ. Tathā vambhanādayo. Upekkhanā upāsakānaṃ dāyakādibhāvato bahi chaḍḍanā. Khipanāti khepavacanaṃ. Taṃ pana avahasitvā vacanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘uppaṇḍanā’’ti. Pāpanāti adāyakattassa, avaṇṇassa vā patiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Paresaṃ piṭṭhimaṃsakhādanasīlo parapiṭṭhimaṃsiko, tassa bhāvo parapiṭṭhimaṃsikatā. Abbhaṅganti abbhañjanaṃ. Nipisitvā gandhamagganā viyāti anippisite alabbhamānassa gandhassa nipisane lābho viya paraguṇe anippisite alabbhamānānaṃ paccayānaṃ nipisanena lābho daṭṭhabboti.
用很少的利益去欺骗别人、想得到很多,这种贪求就叫作贪求;这种状态就是贪求性。这也是那种贪求心现起的表现方式,或者是与它同时生起的寻求行为。巴利
Nikattuṃ appena lābhena bahukaṃ vañcetvā gahetuṃ icchanaṃ nijigīsanaṃ, tassa bhāvo nijigīsanatā. Tasseva icchanassa pavattiākāro, taṃsahajātaṃ vā gavesanakammaṃ.
“支”是指为了手足等肢体的技艺。“相”是指相术。“灾变”是指与流星坠落、方向燃烧、地震等灾变相关的技艺。“梦”是指解梦术。“相好”是指了知男女相好的技艺。“鼠啮”是指了知衣物等某处被老鼠咬后会有某种果报的技艺。在树叶火等当中,用这种火来祭祀就会有某种果报,依火而设立的祭祀仪轨就是火供。按这个方式,也应知道勺供。“等”字应当理解为还包括谷壳供等,以及经中所说的其他邪命。因为活命遍净戒是靠精进成就的,所以被称为“寻求资具的精进”。它的遍净就是没有过失的状态,凭这样的法、这样的平等方式才能获得资具。因为懒惰的人没办法如理地寻求资具。巴利
Aṅganti hatthapādādiaṅgāni uddissa pavattaṃ vijjaṃ. Nimittanti nimittasatthaṃ. Uppātanti ukkāpātadisāḍāha-bhūmicālādiuppātapaṭibaddhavijjaṃ. Supinanti supinasatthaṃ. Lakkhaṇanti itthipurisānaṃ lakkhaṇajānanasatthaṃ. Mūsikacchinnanti vatthādīnaṃ asukabhāge mūsikacchede sati idaṃ nāma phalaṃ hotīti jānanakasatthaṃ. Palāsaggiādīsu iminā nāma agginā hute idaṃ nāma hotīti aggivasena homavidhānaṃ aggihomaṃ. Iminā nayena dabbihomaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ādi-saddena thusahomādīnaṃ, aññesañca sutte āgatānaṃ micchājīvānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Vīriyasādhanattā ājīvapārisuddhisīlassa ‘‘paccayapariyesanavāyāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassa pārisuddhi anavajjabhāvo, yena dhammena samena paccayalābho hoti. Na hi alaso ñāyena paccaye pariyesituṃ sakkotīti.
资具依止戒的注释巴利
Paccayasannissitasīlavaṇṇanā
18 审虑这个说法,就像自己证知等(《大品》11)里那样,是省略了ya音节的简略表达。这里如理一词的意思是方法、途径,为了说明这一点,所以说以方法、以途径。说了审虑而知之后,为了表明这审虑就是观察,所以说观察的意思等等。正如观察是指对防寒等各种用途,一一以智慧观察,同样,审虑就是对同样的那些用途,一一考量、了知。因为在这里,审这个词是智慧的同义词。在这里,如理审虑等说法虽然是在受用资具时说的,但另有人说,依界或依厌恶来观察,资具依止戒才能清净。有人说破坏。又有人说首先是学习通达,这需要考察。衣是单数,意在表示仅仅单一性,所以说下衣等中任何一种;但由于是类别词,巴利文中用单数,应当理解为总括瑜伽行者所应持用的所有衣;所谓任何一种,是毫无遗漏的统摄,不是不确定的说法。而穿或披的分别,是为了显示作为受用同义词的受用的分类;确立此义后,应当知道坐卧处、衣、搭建小屋等受用也包含在内。巴利
18.Paṭisaṅkhāti ayaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 11) viya ya-kāralopena niddeso. Yonisoti cettha upāyattho yoniso-saddoti dassento āha ‘‘upāyena pathenā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭisaṅkhāya ñatvā’’ti vatvā tayidaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘paccavekkhitvāti attho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā hi paccavekkhitvāti sītapaṭighātādikaṃ taṃ taṃ payojanaṃ pati pati avekkhitvā, ñāṇena passitvāti attho, evaṃ paṭisaṅkhāyāti tadeva payojanaṃ pati pati saṅkhāya, jānitvāti attho. Ñāṇapariyāyo hi idha saṅkhā-saddoti. Ettha ca ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’tiādi kāmaṃ paccayaparibhogakālena vuccati, dhātuvasena pana paṭikūlavasena vā paccavekkhaṇāya paccayasannissitasīlaṃ sujjhatīti apare. Bhijjatīti keci. Eke pana paṭhamaṃ eva pariyattanti vadanti, vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. ‘‘Cīvara’’nti ekavacanaṃ ekattamattaṃ vācakanti adhippāyena ‘‘antaravāsakādīsu yaṃ kiñcī’’ti vuttaṃ, jātisaddatāya pana tassa pāḷiyaṃ ekavacananti yattakāni cīvarāni yoginā pariharitabbāni, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahaṇanti sakkā viññātuṃ, yaṃ kiñcīti vā anavasesapariyādānametaṃ, na aniyamavacanaṃ. ‘‘Nivāseti vā pārupati vā’’ti vikappanaṃ pana paṭisevanapariyāyassa paribhogassa vibhāgadassananti taṃ paññapetvā sayananisīdana-cīvarakuṭikaraṇādivasenāpi paribhogassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
用途的界限就是用途的范围,按照限定这个范围而制定的规定,对这种规定的表述就是用途的表述……如此等等。现在为了展开说明这条规定,才说了“仅仅到此为止”等话。其中,通过限定词否定了以嬉戏、装饰、垂挂、表演等方式受用物品。因此说“不超过这个”。因为有些众生以嬉戏的方式穿衣服、裹身体,就像处在青年时期的城里人那样。有些以装饰的方式,就像靠色相谋生的人等那样。有些以垂挂的方式,就是垂挂的人。有些以表演的方式,就像演员等那样。内在界(身体元素)的扰动,是产生寒病等的根源。以季节变化的方式,就是由于季节转换,由不相应的寒冷季节所引起。通过“或”这个字,应当知道还包含了冬季降霜等所产生的情况,但意思并不是说(寒冷季节)产生了寒冷。为了显示驱除寒冷的最终目的,才说了“被寒冷侵袭”等话。在一切处,就是在“为了防热”等所有其余用途中。虽然太阳的热也是热,但因为“日晒”这个词已经涵盖,所以另说“火的热”。有人能够用衣服覆盖身体来驱除林火的热,所以说“应当知道它发生在林火等中”。虻就是黄蝇。因为它们有叮咬的习性,所以说“叮咬蝇”。蛇等就是蛇、蜈蚣、沙蝇、蜥蜴、蝎子等。触毒就是接触之毒。蛇有三种:咬毒、触毒、见毒。其中只取了前两种,是为了把蜈蚣等同类也包含进来。固定的用途是绝对的、一切时中都可用的用途。惭被破坏,无惭就站住了。因此说“消失”。值得覆盖或遮蔽下身的,就是“遮盖物”。从“应惭”的意义上说,惭和那遮盖物合称“惭遮盖物”,这里的意思应当这样理解。而“那”这个字,是用来总括前面所说的各种用途的。巴利
Payojanānaṃ mariyādā payojanāvadhi, tassa paricchindanavasena yo niyamo, tassa vacanaṃ payojanā…pe… vacanaṃ. Idāni taṃ niyamaṃ vivaritvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ettakameva hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avadhāraṇena līḷāvibhūsāvilambanānaṭambarādivasena vatthaparibhogaṃ nisedheti. Tenāha ‘‘na ito bhiyyo’’ti. Līḷāvasena hi ekacce sattā vatthāni paridahanti ceva upasaṃviyanti ca. Yathā taṃ yobbane ṭhitā nāgarikamanussā. Ekacce vibhūsanavasena, yathā taṃ rūpūpajīviniādayo. Vilambanavasena vilambakā. Naṭambaravasena bhojādayo. Ajjhattadhātukkhobho sītarogādiuppādako. Utupariṇāmanavasenāti utuno parivattanavasena visabhāgasītautusamuṭṭhānena. Vā-saddena hemantādīsu himapātādivasena pavattassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, na uppādeti sītanti adhippāyo. Yadatthaṃ pana taṃ vinodanaṃ, taṃ matthakappattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sītabbhāhate’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbatthāti ‘‘uṇhassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādīsu sabbesu sesapayojanesu. Yadipi sūriyasantāpopi uṇhova, tassa pana ātapaggahaṇena gahitattā ‘‘aggisantāpassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekacco dāvaggisantāpo kāyaṃ cīvarena paṭicchādetvā sakkā vinodetunti āha ‘‘tassa vanadāhādīsu sambhavo veditabbo’’ti. Ḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikā. Te pana yasmā ḍaṃsanasīlā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ḍaṃsanamakkhikā’’ti. Sappādayoti sappasatapadiuṇṇanābhisarabūvicchikādayo. Phuṭṭhasamphassoti phuṭṭhavisamāha. Tividhā hi sappā – daṭṭhavisā phuṭṭhavisā diṭṭhavisā. Tesu purimakā dve eva gahitā. Satapadiādīnampi tādisānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ. Niyatapayojanaṃ ekantikaṃ, sabbakālikañca payojanaṃ. Hirī kuppati nillajjatā saṇṭhāti. Tenāha ‘‘vinassatī’’ti. Kūpāvataraṇaṃ vā paṭicchādanaṃ arahatīti kopinaṃ. Hiriyitabbaṭṭhena hirī ca taṃ kopinañcāti hirikopinanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tassa cāti ca-saddo pubbe vuttapayojanānaṃ sampiṇḍanattho.
凡是“食物”,就是指各种嚼食、啖食等类别的、任何可以拿来吃的东西。为了团食、为了乞食而取用,所以叫团食者,他的行为就是团食业。以这种团食业来行乞食。因为已投入,就是已放进去了。团食就是把乞来的食物放进钵里。或者团食就是食物之投放,也就是挨家挨户所得乞食的聚集。在“没有戏”等说法里,仓促行事也叫“戏”,为了区分,所以说“意思是‘为了戏、为了游戏的原因’”。拳斗士就是从事拳击格斗的人。用“等”字来包括角斗者等等。力醉的原因,就是依靠力而生起的醉,叫力醉,以此为因,意思是为了产生力。人醉的原因,就是所谓人醉,是生起“我是男人”这种心态的慢。有些人说,依靠行非法之能力而起的慢,或者贪本身就是人醉,以此为因。内宫妇就是国王的后妃。妓女因为适合众人聚集,是靠色相谋生的人。这里所说的庄严,指肢体的圆满,所以说“是肢节丰满的原因”,意思是为了增肥。演员就是舞台上的演员。舞者就是跳跃者等等。装饰就是产生光彩,所以说“是肤色明净的原因”。巴利
Yaṃ kiñci āhāranti khādanīyabhojanīyādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci āharitabbavatthuṃ. Piṇḍāya bhikkhāya ulatīti piṇḍolo, tassa kammaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ. Tena piṇḍolyena bhikkhācariyāya. Patitattāti pakkhipitattā. Piṇḍapāto patte pakkhittabhikkhāhāro. Piṇḍānaṃ vā pātoti ghare ghare laddhabhikkhānaṃ sannipāto. ‘‘Natthi davā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305) sahasā kiriyāpi ‘‘davā’’ti vuccati, tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘davatthaṃ, kīḷānimittanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Muṭṭhikamallā muṭṭhiyuddhayujjhanakā. Ādi-saddena nibuddhayujjhanakādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Balamadanimittanti balaṃ nissāya uppajjanakamado balamado. Taṃ nimittaṃ, balassa uppādanatthanti attho. Porisamadanimittanti porisamado vuccati purisamāno ‘‘ahaṃ puriso’’ti uppajjanakamāno. Asaddhammasevanāsamatthataṃ nissāya pavatto māno, rāgo eva vā porisamadoti keci. Taṃ nimittaṃ. Antepurikā rājorodhā. Sabbesaṃ sannivesayogyatāya vesiyo rūpūpajīviniyo. Maṇḍanaṃ nāma idhāvayavapāripūrīti āha ‘‘aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ pīṇabhāvanimitta’’nti, paribrūhanahetūti attho. Naṭā nāma raṅganaṭā. Naccakā laṅghakādayo. Vibhūsanaṃ sobhāsamuppādananti āha ‘‘pasannacchavivaṇṇatānimitta’’nti.
这是那句话。为了断除痴的近依,也就是为了断除痴的近依。因为嬉戏确实由痴而生,又会增长痴,所以通过避开嬉戏,痴就失去了近依。为了断除嗔的近依,这是就力醉和人醉以嗔为因来说的;至于另一种醉,则应当说为了断除贪的近依。对装饰庄严的遮止,也可能有助于断除痴的近依,但由于它直接对治贪的近依,所以说为了断除贪的近依。虽然某些人的嬉戏和醉确实会导致对他人产生嗔结缚等,就像心被毁坏的天人那样,但就自身的嬉戏和醉而言,对于那些特别容易生起贪、痴、慢等恶法的人,针对他们说了为了遮止自己结缚的生起之后,又因为装饰庄严特别能使他人也生起贪、痴等,所以说为了遮止他人结缚的生起。在非理行中,这里除了欲乐享受之外,一切邪行都是非理行。有人说,前两句说的是断除非理行,后两句说的是断除欲乐享受。然而,根据以此四者这句话,应当知道所有句子中都包含了这两者的断除。欲乐游戏也含摄在嬉戏之中,人醉也是欲乐享受的因。巴利
Etaṃ padaṃ. Mohūpanissayappahānatthanti mohassa upanissayatāpahānāya. Davā hi mohena hoti, mohañca vaḍḍhetīti tassā vajjanena mohassa anupanissayatā. Dosūpanissayappahānatthanti idaṃ balamadassa, purisamadassa ca dosahetuno vasena vuttaṃ, itarassa pana vasena ‘‘rāgūpanissayappahānattha’’nti vattabbaṃ. Maṇḍanavibhūsanapaṭikkhepo siyā mohūpanissayappahānāyapi, rāgūpanissayatāya pana ujupaṭipakkhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgūpanissayappahānattha’’nti. Yadipi ekaccassa davamade ārabbha parassa paṭighasaṃyojanādīnaṃ uppatti hotiyeva manopadosikadevādīnaṃ viya, attano pana davamade ārabbha yesaṃ savisesaṃ rāgamohamānādayo pāpadhammā uppajjanti. Te sandhāya ‘‘attano saṃyojanuppattipaṭisedhanattha’’nti vatvā maṇḍanavibhūsanāni paṭicca savisesaṃ parassapi rāgamohādayo pavattantīti ‘‘parassapi saṃyojanuppattipaṭisedhanattha’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayoniso paṭipattiyāti ettha kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ muñcitvā sabbāpi micchāpaṭipatti ayoniso paṭipatti. Purimehi dvīhi padehi ayoniso paṭipattiyā, pacchimehi dvīhi kāmasukhallikānuyogassa pahānaṃ vuttanti vadanti. ‘‘Catūhipi cetehī’’ti pana vacanato sabbehi ubhinnampi pahānaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Kāmakīḷāpi davantogadhā hotiyeva, purisamadopi kāmasukhallikānuyogassa hetuyevāti.
“四大所造”是指依靠四大种。“色身”是指四种相续色的集合。“住立”是住立的意思。而那种住立,是依相续而说的,所以说“相续住立之义”。“流转”是指命根的运转。因为命根被描述为“维持、运行”(《法集》19, 634)。而它的不间断,是由食物的受用而来。为了说明身体能更长久地、直到寿命终结期间安住、维持,所以说“或长时住立之义”。现在为了让所说的意思更加清楚,说了“如撑屋之柱”等譬喻。这里的配释是这样的:就像旧屋的主人为了屋子不倒塌而给它作支撑,又像车夫为了使车顺利运转而给车轴涂油,同样,这位瑜伽行者为了身体的住立、为了维持而受用、食用钵食。由此说明:住立就是不倒塌,维持就是运转。不是为了嬉戏、骄慢、装饰、庄严,这是用“只是”这个限定词来显示所遮止的意思。诸所执受法依此而住立,所以叫住立,也就是寿命,所以说“住立是命根的异名”。因为寿命被描述为“住立”,为了住立、为了维持,也就是为了身体住立的因,而名为“住立”的命根运转之义。因此说“为了命根的运转”。以逼恼之义,或以病之义——因为饥饿是最大的病。为了止息的意思,就像疮患者涂疮药;当寒热等逼迫时,他像受用能对治寒热的东西那样而受用钵食,这就是譬喻的关联。除了道梵行之外,摄于三学、应在教法中修习奉行的教诫,就是教法梵行,所以说“无论是全体教法梵行,还是道梵行”。“为资助”是指为了不断摄持、成办的意思。“依身力”是指仅依凭那作为成就诸功德之因、如所着手而有的身力。因此说“依凭三学之修习”等。譬如夫妻二人为了越过旷野,或为了渡越江海的人,食用亲子之肉等物时,并非贪恋、迷恋,只是顾念事情得以成办,因为舍此则事不得成;同样,这位比丘也只是为了越过轮回的旷野,不贪恋、不迷恋,因为舍此钵食则事不得成,所以受用钵食:这就是譬喻的会通。巴利
Cātumahābhūtikassāti catumahābhūte sannissitassa. Rūpakāyassāti catusantatirūpasamūhassa. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Sā panassa ṭhiti pabandhavasena icchitāti āha ‘‘pabandhaṭṭhitattha’’nti. Pavattiyāti jīvitindriyappavattiyā. Tathā hi jīvitindriyaṃ ‘‘yāpanā vattanā’’ti (dha. sa. 19, 634) ca niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tassā ca avicchedo āhārūpayogena hoti. Kāyassa cirataraṃ yāva āyukappo, tāva avatthānaṃ yāpanāti dassento ‘‘cirakālaṭṭhitatthaṃ vā’’ti āha. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘gharūpatthambhamivā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – yathā jiṇṇagharasāmiko gharassa upatthambhanaṃ karoti tassa apatanatthaṃ, yathā ca sākaṭiko akkhabbhañjanaṃ karoti tassa sampavattanatthaṃ, evamesa yogī kāyassa ṭhitatthaṃ, yāpanatthañca piṇḍapātaṃ paṭisevati paribhuñjatīti. Etena ṭhiti nāma apatanaṃ yāpanā pavattīti dasseti. Na davamadamaṇḍanavibhūsanatthanti idaṃ ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti avadhāraṇena nivattitatthadassanaṃ. Tiṭṭhanti upādinnadhammā etāyāti ṭhiti, āyūti āha ‘‘ṭhitīti jīvitindriyassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Tathā hi taṃ āyu ‘‘ṭhitī’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ, ṭhitiyā yāpanāyāti kāyassa ṭhitihetutāya ‘‘ṭhitī’’ti laddhavohārassa jīvitindriyassa pavattanatthanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘jīvitindriyapavattāpanattha’’nti. Ābādhaṭṭhenāti vibādhanaṭṭhena, rogaṭṭhena vā. Jighacchāparamā hi rogā. Uparamatthanti vūpasamatthaṃ. Vaṇālepanamiva vaṇiko. Uṇhasītādīsu abhibhavantesu tappaṭikāraṃ sītuṇhaṃ viya paṭisevatīti sambandho. Maggabrahmacariyaṃ ṭhapetvā sikkhattayasaṅgahā sāsanāvacaritabbā anusāsanī sāsanabrahmacariyanti āha ‘‘sakalasāsanabrahmacariyassa ca maggabrahmacariyassa cā’’ti. Anuggahaṇatthanti anu anu gaṇhanatthaṃ sampādanatthaṃ. Kāyabalaṃ nissāyāti yathāsamāraddhaṃ guṇavisesapāripūrihetubhūtaṃ kāyabalamattaṃ nissāya. Tenāha ‘‘sikkhattayānuyogavasenā’’tiādi. Kantāranittharaṇatthikā jāyampatikā, nadīsamuddanittharaṇatthikā ca puttamaṃsādīni yathā agiddhā amucchitā kevalaṃ taṃ taṃ atthasiddhimeva avekkhantā paṭisevanti tehi vinā asijjhanato, evamayampi kevalaṃ bhavakantāranittharaṇatthiko agiddho amucchito tena vinā asijjhanato piṇḍapātaṃ paṭisevatīti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ.
“如此”这个词是表示方式的虚词。通过它,正在受用的钵食的受用方式就被表达出来了,所以说“如此,以这种钵食受用”。“旧”是指因为比进食的时间更早,所以是旧的。“我将遮止”就是我将对抗。“我将不产生新的感受”——这样受用,就是整句的关联。是什么样的、怎么样的呢?所以说“如无限……如同其中某一种人”。无限就是没有限量,食物是它的缘,所以叫“以无限食物为缘”,意思是说,那以无限食物为缘的感受,是由超过自身消化火力限度的过量食物所引起的。有人吃多了以后,按自己的状况站不起来,就喊“把手拿来”,这就是“伸手者”。有人吃多了以后,因为肚子胀得太厉害,虽然站起来了,却没办法穿上衣,这就是“穿不了衣者”。有人吃多了以后站不起来,就地翻来滚去,这就是“就地翻滚者”。有人吃东西时,像乌鸦能啄到那样,一直往嘴里塞,这就是“乌鸦啄食者”。有人吃多了以后含不住,当场就吐出来,这就是“吃了就吐者”。就像这些人当中的某一种。或者也可以说,“旧受”是指由没吃东西这个缘而生起的感受,他为了“遮止”它而受用。“新受”是指由吃太多这个缘而生起的感受,他为了“不产生”它而受用。另一种说法是,“新受”是指由没吃东西这个缘而生起的感受,他受用是为了让那还没生起的感受不生起。“由没吃东西这个缘而生起”这句话,是用来限定饥饿的,是为了说明那种应该靠食物来让它不活动的感受。在由没吃东西的缘和由吃了东西的缘所生起、以及不生起的感受当中,前者是已经生起的、以饥饿为特征的那种感受,因为它对没吃东西的人来说会越来越强烈。后者也是以饥饿为特征,表现为四肢灼热、刺痛等感受。它由吃了东西的缘,之前没生起,以后也不会生起,这就是它们之间的差别。“以恼害为特征”则是它们与恼害之间的差别。巴利
Itīti pakāratthe nipātapadaṃ. Tena paṭiseviyamānassa piṇḍapātassa paṭisevanākāro gayhatīti āha ‘‘evaṃ iminā piṇḍapātapaṭisevanenā’’ti. Purāṇanti bhojanato purimakālikattā purātanaṃ. Paṭihaṅkhāmīti paṭihanissāmi. Navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmīti paṭisevatīti yojanā. Kīdisaṃ, kathañcāti āha ‘‘aparimita…pe… aññataro viyā’’ti. Aparimitaṃ aparimāṇaṃ bhojanaṃ paccayo etissāti aparimitabhojanapaccayā, taṃ aparimitabhojanapaccayaṃ attano gahaṇītejapamāṇato atikkantapamāṇabhojanahetukanti attho. Yo bahuṃ bhuñjitvā attano dhammatāya uṭṭhātuṃ asakkonto ‘‘āhara hattha’’nti vadati, ayaṃ āharahatthako. Yo bhuñjitvā accuddhumātakucchitāya uṭṭhitopi sāṭakaṃ nivāsetuṃ na sakkoti, ayaṃ alaṃsāṭako. Yo bhuñjitvā uṭṭhātuṃ asakkonto tattheva parivattati, ayaṃ tatravaṭṭako. Yo yathā kākehi āmasituṃ sakkā, evaṃ yāva mukhadvāraṃ āhāreti, ayaṃ kākamāsako. Yo bhuñjitvā mukhe sandhāretuṃ asakkonto tattheva vamati, ayaṃ bhuttavamitako. Etesaṃ aññataro viya. Atha vā purāṇavedanā nāma abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanā. Taṃ ‘‘paṭihanissāmī’’ti paṭisevati. Navavedanā nāma atibhuttapaccayena uppajjanakavedanā. Taṃ ‘‘na uppādessāmī’’ti paṭisevati. Atha vā navavedanā nāma abhuttapaccayena uppajjanakavedanā, tassā anuppannāya anuppajjanatthameva paṭisevati. Abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakāti cetaṃ khuddāya visesanaṃ. Yassā appavatti bhojanena kātabbā, tassā dassanatthaṃ. Abhuttapaccayena, bhuttapaccayena ca uppajjanakānuppajjanakavedanāsu purimā yathāpavattā jighacchānimittā vedanā. Sā hi abhuñjantassa bhiyyopavaḍḍhanavasena uppajjati. Pacchimāpi khuddānimittāva aṅgadāhasūlādivedanā pavattā. Sā hi bhuttapaccayā pubbe anuppannāva nuppajjissatīti ayametāsaṃ viseso. Vihiṃsānimittatā cetāsaṃ vihiṃsāya viseso.
受,就是现在。“依于不适当且无节制的饮食”,意思是由于不适当且无节制地取用食物而生起。“依于旧业之缘”,是说因为过去前生所造旧业的缘力,因受用不当而有生起的可能,所以避开它,以受用的圆满使它不生起——这就是破坏苦受的缘并对治它,因此说“我破坏它的缘,对治那旧受”。不如理受用,是指不加省察而受用资具。那本身就是已作已积的业,成为业的积集,依此、缘此,在未来时生起,所以说这是“新受”——如此连接。“依于如理受用”,是指省察之后受用资具,由此不让那新受的根本——不如理受用的业——生起,即完全使它不生。到这里,以“如是旧……”等所说的两句,或以“为离害……”等四句,已经说明了如理受用,因为已阐明了适合出家人的资具受用。由于已说对治饥渴等苦,也就已说舍弃自我折磨的修行。由于不舍弃作为禅那乐等之缘的身乐,也就阐明了不舍弃如法之乐。巴利
Yā vedanā. Adhunāti etarahi. Asappāyāparimitabhojanaṃ nissāyāti asappāyāparimitassa āhārassa bhuñjanapayogaṃ āgamma uppajjatīti attho. Purāṇakammapaccayavasenāti pubbe purimajātiyaṃ katattā purāṇassa kammassa paccayatāvasena payogavipattiṃ āgamma uppajjanārahatāya taṃ vajjetvā payogasampattiyā upaṭṭhāpanaṃ dukkhavedanāpaccayaghāto, paṭihananañca hotīti āha ‘‘tassā paccayaṃ vināsento taṃ purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmī’’ti. Ayuttaparibhogo paccaye apaccavekkhitvā paribhogo. So eva katūpacitakammatāya kammūpacayo. Taṃ nissāya paṭicca āyatiṃ anāgate kāle uppajjanato yā cāyaṃ ‘‘navavedanā’’ti vuccatīti yojanā. Yuttaparibhogavasenāti paccavekkhitvā paccayānaṃ paribhogavasena, tassā navavedanāya mūlaṃ ayuttaparibhogakammaṃ anibbattento sabbena sabbaṃ anuppādento. Ettāvatāti ‘‘iti purāṇa’’ntiādinā vuttena padadvayena. ‘‘Vihiṃsūparatiyā’’tiādinā vā padacatukkena yuttaparibhogasaṅgaho pabbajitānucchavikassa paccayaparibhogassa vuttattā. Attakilamathānuyogappahānaṃ jighacchādidukkhapaṭighātassa bhāsitattā. Jhānasukhādīnaṃ paccayabhūtassa kāyasukhassa avissajjanato dhammikasukhāpariccāgo ca dīpito hoti.
用不合适、又没有节制的受用方式,可能会成为断绝命根或破坏威仪的灾患;但用合适而有节制的受用方式,就不会这样。如果能那样,就会有所谓身体长久延续的存续和维持。为了显示这个意思,所以说“以有节制的受用……将会……”。那种既不是能治好的病,也不是治不好的病,就叫可维持的病;他有这种病,所以叫可维持病者。因为他一直使用药物,这位比丘也是这样。如果“yātrā”也就是“yāpanā”,前面已经说过“yāpanā”,那这里还有什么差别呢?前面说的“yāpanā”是指维持命根,而这里说的“yāpanā yātrā”是指四种威仪不间断,这就是这里的差别。用佛陀所呵斥的邪命去寻求资具,是不如理寻求。不知道施主所施之物以及自己的量就接受,或者为了损耗信施而接受,是不如理接受,因此还会犯戒。没有省察就受用,是不如理受用。应当知道,避免这些,就是以如法、平等的方式获取资具等。因为如法地寻求资具,如法地接受,省察之后受用,这就叫无过失。巴利
Asappāyāparimitūpayogena jīvitindriyupacchedako, iriyāpathabhañjanako vā siyā parissayo, sappāyaparimitūpayogena pana so na hoti. Tathā sati cirakālappavattisaṅkhātā sarīrassa yātrā yāpanā bhavissatīti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘parimitaparibhogena…pe… bhavissatī’’ti āha. Yo rogo sāddho asāddho ca na hoti, so yāpyarogo, so etassa atthīti yāpyarogī. So hi niccakālaṃ bhesajjaṃ upasevati, tathā ayampīti. Yadi yātrāpi yāpanā, pubbepi ‘‘yāpanāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, ko ettha visesoti? Pubbe ‘‘yāpanāyā’’ti jīvitindriyayāpanā adhippetā, idha pana catunnampi iriyāpathānaṃ avicchedasaṅkhātā yāpanā yātrāti ayamettha viseso. Buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchājīvena paccayapariyesanā ayuttapariyesanā. Dāyakadeyyadhammānaṃ, attano ca pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā paṭiggahaṇaṃ, saddhādeyyavinipātanatthaṃ vā paṭiggahaṇaṃ ayuttapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, yena vā āpattiṃ āpajjati. Apaccavekkhitvā paribhogo ayuttaparibhogo. Tesaṃ parivajjanaṃ dhammena samena paccayuppādanādivasena veditabbaṃ. Dhammena hi paccaye pariyesitvā dhammena paṭiggahetvā paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanaṃ anavajjatā nāma.
“不乐”就是厌倦。在边远的住处,以及对增上的善法没有欢喜心。“懈怠”就是昏昏欲睡。“伸懒腰”是因为被昏沉睡眠压倒,身体伸展。被智者呵责,就是“智者呵责”。有些人确实把本来没有过失的事变成了有过失:他心里想“我得到了”,就吃得超过适量,结果消化不了,靠催吐、通便等办法折腾自己,弄得全寺院的比丘都忙着照顾他的身体、到处找药。其他人问“这是怎么回事”,听说“某某人肚子胀了”之类的话,就批评说:“这人老是这副样子,连自己肚子能装多少都不知道。”这样就是把没过失的事变成了有过失。不这样做,而是想“这样就没有过失”,然后去受用。因为他知道自己本来的消化能力等,心想“这样我就不会有不乐等,身体会舒服,也不会被批评”,所以只受用适量的。按食物所需,以填满肚子来达成所需之量,即吃到撑满肚子之食,叫“饱撑肚食”,要避免这个。以床榻躺卧所得的快乐是“卧乐”,翻身侧睡时生起的快乐是“侧乐”,因昏沉而睡着时生起的快乐是“眠乐”,舍弃这些卧乐、侧乐、眠乐,让身体适合行住坐卧四种姿势,就是“令身适合四威仪”,由此而来。安乐地安住在威仪中,就是“乐住”。在最后一种解释中,或者在所有解释中,为了用经教证明所说的乐住的含义,说了“这也是曾经说过的”等等。因为在三种解释中,都是就少量受用食物而说乐住的。巴利
Aratīti ukkaṇṭhā. Pantasenāsanesu, adhikusaladhammesu ca anabhirati. Tandīti pacalāyikā niddā. Vijambhitāti thinamiddhābhibhavena kāyassa vijambhanā. Viññūhi garahā viññūgarahā. Ekacco hi anavajjaṃyeva sāvajjaṃ karoti, ‘‘laddhaṃ me’’ti pamāṇādhikaṃ bhuñjitvā taṃ jīrāpetuṃ asakkonto uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi kilamati, sakalavihāre bhikkhū tassa sarīrapaṭijagganabhesajjapariyesanāpasutā honti. Aññe te ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘asukassa udaraṃ uddhumāta’’ntiādīni sutvā ‘‘niccakālamesa evaṃpakatiko attano kucchipamāṇaṃ nāma na jānātī’’ti nindanti, evaṃ anavajjaṃyeva sāvajjaṃ karoti. Evaṃ akatvā ‘‘anavajjatā ca bhavissatī’’ti paṭisevati. Attano hi pakatiaggibalādiṃ jānitvā ‘‘evaṃ me aratiādīnaṃ abhāvena kāyasukhatā, agarahitabbatā ca bhavissatī’’ti pamāṇayuttameva paṭisevati. Yāvatako bhojanena attho, tassa sādhanena yāvadatthaṃ udarassa paripūraṇena udarāvadehakaṃ bhojanaṃ yāvadatthaudarāvadehakabhojanaṃ, tassa parivajjanena. Seyyāya sayanena laddhabbasukhaṃ seyyasukhaṃ, ubhohi passehi samparivattanakaṃ sayantassa uppajjanasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ , middhena niddāyanena uppajjanasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ, tesaṃ seyya…pe… sukhānaṃ pahānato catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yogyabhāvassa paṭipādanaṃ kāyassa catuiriyāpathayogyabhāvapaṭipādanaṃ, tato. Sukho iriyāpathavihāro phāsuvihāro. Pacchime vikappe, sabbavikappesu vā vuttaṃ phāsuvihāralakkhaṇaṃ āgamena samatthetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi heta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tīsupi vikappesu āhārassa ūnaparibhogavaseneva hi phāsuvihāro vuttoti.
“到此为止”这句话,是用“存续”等三个词来说明的。“我将有存续”这句,是在显示把握目的,因为存续确实会促使他取用食物。以不舍弃如法之乐为因的安住,就是中道,因为它远离了两个极端。不过在这个地方,应当总摄八支:“不为嬉戏”是一支,“不为骄慢”是一支,“不为装饰”是一支,“不为庄严”是一支,“只是为了这个身体的住立、维持”是一支,“为了离害、为了助成梵行”是一支,“这样,我就能对治旧受,不令新受生起”是一支,“我将有存续”是一支。“无过失与安住”,就是这里所说的食物的功德。不过大西瓦长老说:“下面四支叫作遮止,上面则应当总摄八支。”其中,“只是为了这个身体的住立”是一支,“为了维持”是一支,“为了离害”是一支,“为了助成梵行”是一支,“这样,我就能对治旧受”是一支,“不令新受生起”是一支,“我将有存续”是一支,“无过失”是一支。而安住则是食物的功德。这样,具足八支而进食的比丘,就叫作如理省察而受用钵食。巴利
Ettāvatāti ‘‘yātrā’’tiādinā vuttena padattayena. ‘‘Yātrā ca me bhavissatī’’ti payojanapariggahadīpanā. Yātrā hi naṃ āhārūpayogaṃ payojetīti. Dhammikasukhāpariccāgahetuko phāsuvihāro majjhimā paṭipadā antadvayaparivajjanato. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne aṭṭha aṅgāni samodhānetabbāni – ‘‘neva davāyā’’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘na madāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘na maṇḍanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘na vibhūsanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘vihiṃsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmi, navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘yātrā ca me bhavissatī’’ti ekaṃ. ‘‘Anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cā’’ti ayamettha bhojanānisaṃso. Mahāsivatthero panāha ‘‘heṭṭhā cattāri aṅgāni paṭikkhepo nāma, upari pana aṭṭhaṅgāni samodhānetabbānī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘yāpanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘vihiṃsūparatiyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘brahmacariyānuggahāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘yātrā ca me bhavissatī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘anavajjatā cā’’ti ekaṃ. Phāsuvihāro pana bhojanānisaṃsoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhārento paṭisaṅkhā yoniso piṇḍapātaṃ paṭisevati nāma.
“Yattha yattha”这一处,是用处格来说明“sena”这个词表示依处之义;同样也说明“āsana”这个词表示依处之义。“aḍḍhayogādimhi”里的“ādi”一词,涵盖了殿堂等,也涵盖了床等。“yattha yattha vihāre vā aḍḍhayogādimhi vā āsatīti”应当这样理解:把精舍、半覆屋等引入之后加以连接。这里应当知道,“ādi”一词也涵盖了凳子、敷具等。“parisahanaṭṭhena”是征服之义、逼迫之义,这就是它的意思。“utuyeva utuparissayo”是说,寒暑等时节本身就是不适的,按照前面所说的方式,称为时节危难。它的目的是:为了驱除该时节危难,为了令未生的不适不生起,为了令已生的不适止息。把心从种种所缘收摄回来,正确地安住于单一的、作为业处的所缘上,这称为宴默;在其中享有喜乐、欣悦,则称为乐宴默者,即以此为目的。因为寂静的住处,由于是空寂之处的状态,对瑜伽行者的修习是随顺的。为了阐明这两种含义,说了“yo sarīrābādhacittavikkhepakaro”等语。其中,“ekībhāvasukhatthaṃ”是指以独处为因的乐,即独处之乐,以此为目的。也就是由远离群体杂染和烦恼杂染而生起的乐。巴利
Yattha yatthāti bhummaniddesena sena-saddassa adhikaraṇatthavuttimāha. Tathā āsana-saddassāti. Aḍḍhayogādimhīti ādi-saddena pāsādādiṃ, mañcādiñca saṅgaṇhāti. Yattha yattha vihāre vā aḍḍhayogādimhi vā āsatīti vihāraaḍḍhayogādike ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Idha ādi-saddena pīṭhasanthatādīnampi saṅgaho veditabbo. Parisahanaṭṭhenāti abhibhavanaṭṭhena, vibādhanaṭṭhenāti attho. Utuyeva utuparissayoti sītuṇhādiutuyeva asappāyo vuttanayena utuparissayo. Tassa utuparissayassa vinodanatthaṃ, anuppannassa anuppādanatthaṃ, uppannassa vūpasamanatthañcāti attho. Nānārammaṇato paṭisaṃharitvā kammaṭṭhānabhūte ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittassa sammadeva layanaṃ paṭisallānaṃ, tattha ārāmo abhirati paṭisallānārāmo, tadatthaṃ. Senāsanaṃ hi vivittaṃ yogino bhāvanānukūlaṃ suññāgārabhāvato. Taṃ panetaṃ atthadvayaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yo sarīrābādhacittavikkhepakaro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ekībhāvasukhatthanti ekībhāvahetukaṃ sukhaṃ ekībhāvasukhaṃ, tadatthaṃ. Gaṇasaṅgaṇikakilesasaṅgaṇikābhāvena uppajjanakasukhaṃ.
如果时节危难就是时节本身,那么已经说了“时节与寒热”,也就是说了抵御寒热,为什么还要说驱除时节危难呢?针对这个责难,才说了“kāmañcā”等话。其中,通过“确定要驱除时节危难”这句话,表明这里所说的寒热是不确定的、只是偶尔生起的,而时节危难则被意指为始终存在的。所谓“如上所说的那种”,就是指像前面说的“寒冷等、不适的”那样:比丘坐在露天处、树下等地方,因为没有保护、门户不关等,会有明显的危难;因为看到不适的色等,会有不明显的危难,这些都会损害比丘的身心。而在有保护的住处,它们就不会造成损害。这样了解之后,也就是知道远离这两种危难之后再受用,这样的比丘才是应当被理解的——这就是句子的连接关系。巴利
Yadi utuyeva utuparissayo, ‘‘utu ca sītuṇha’’nti sītuṇhapaṭighātaṃ vatvā utuparissayavinodanaṃ kasmā vuttanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kāmañcā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘niyataṃ utuparissayavinodana’’nti etena ‘‘sītassa paṭighātāya uṇhassa paṭighātāyā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ sītuṇhaṃ aniyataṃ kadāci kadāci uppajjanakaṃ, utuparissayo pana sabbadābhāvī adhippetoti dasseti. Vuttappakāroti ‘‘sītādiko, asappāyo’’ti ca evaṃ vuttappakāro vivaṭaṅgaṇarukkhamūlādīsu nisinnassa apariguttiyā asaṃvutadvārāditāya pākaṭaparissayā, asappāyarūpadassanādinā apākaṭaparissayā ca bhikkhussa kāyacittānaṃ ābādhaṃ kareyyuṃ. Yattha gutte senāsane ābādhaṃ na karonti. Evaṃ jānitvāti ubhayaparissayarahitanti evaṃ ñatvā paṭisevanto bhikkhu veditabboti sambandho.
对于以界扰动为特征、或以由它引起的苦受为特征的疾病,与之相对立的状态就是“对治”的意思。因此说“以走向对立面为含义”,也就是说,以止息为含义。“无论谁的”是指在酥油等当中的任何一种。“适合的”的意思则是:通过它使那种病变得以止息。这是医生的工作,因为应当由他来安排。因此说“由于被他允许的缘故”。“城市资具”是指围绕城市加以守护的那些东西。他们说,敞开的围墙、壁垒、土墙、柱、门闩、墙台这七种,称为“城市资具”。“戒资具”是指善加清净的戒之庄严。因为在此,圣道被称为“车”。而它的正语等,以庄严之义被称为“资具”。“生活资具”是指维持生命的原因。“应当聚集”是指应当正确地向上带来、寻求。也有围绕之义,因为从周围阻挡障碍。因此说“从保护生命……”。巴利
Dhātukkhobhalakkhaṇassa, taṃhetukadukkhavedanālakkhaṇassa vā rogassa paṭipakkhabhāvo paṭiayanaṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘paccanīkagamanaṭṭhenāti attho’’ti, vūpasamanaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yassa kassacīti sappiādīsu yassa kassaci. Sappāyassāti hi tassa vikāravūpasamenāti adhippāyo. Bhisakkassa kammaṃ tena vidhātabbato. Tenāha ‘‘tena anuññātattā’’ti. Nagaraparikkhārehīti nagaraṃ parivāretvā rakkhaṇakehi. Vivaṭaparikkhepo parikkhā uḍḍāpo pākāro esikā paligho pākārapatthaṇḍilanti satta ‘‘nagaraparikkhārā’’ti vadanti. Sīlaparikkhāroti suvisuddhasīlālaṅkāro . Ariyamaggo hi idha ‘‘ratho’’ti adhippeto. Tassa ca sammāvācādayo alaṅkāraṭṭhena ‘‘parikkhāro’’ti vuttā. Jīvitaparikkhārāti jīvitassa pavattikāraṇāni. Samudānetabbāti sammā uddhaṃ uddhaṃ ānetabbā pariyesitabbā. Parivāropi hoti antarāyānaṃ parito vāraṇato. Tenāha ‘‘jīvita…pe… rakkhaṇato’’ti.
这里,“间隙”指空隙,意思是机会。因为就像仆人不给敌人可乘之机,围绕自己的主人站立守护一样,这是从守护的角度说的。“命”指生命。因为它是长久维持的因缘。长生药确实能让生命维持极长时间。即使未生起的苦受通过服药而被对治,已生起的苦受则不然,因为它们靠自性而坏灭,但与已生起相似的,仍被称为“已生起”。因为对相似的事物有这种说法,比如“就是那只鹧鸪”“就是那些药草”。因此说“已生起的,即已生、已存在、已产生的”。从积聚开始,那个界的扰动就是这些的起因,所以它们是“以它为起因的”。说了“苦受”之后,由于它也有不善的性质,为了加以区分,所以说“不善异熟受”。以逼迫为义的就是逼迫,逼迫本身就是苦,也就是苦。这里没有逼迫的,就是无逼迫,即无苦的状态。因此说“以无逼迫为究竟”,即以无苦为究竟。那是指以疾病为因的苦。巴利
Tattha antaranti vivaraṃ, okāsoti attho. Verikānaṃ antaraṃ adatvā attano sāmikānaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitasevakā viya rakkhaṇato. Assāti jīvitassa. Kāraṇabhāvatoti cirappavattiyā kāraṇabhāvato. Rasāyanabhūtaṃ hi bhesajjaṃ sucirampi kālaṃ jīvitaṃ pavattetiyeva. Yadipi anuppannā eva dukkhavedanā bhesajjaparibhogena paṭihaññanti, na uppannā tāsaṃ saraseneva bhijjanato, uppannasadisā pana ‘‘uppannā’’ti vuccanti. Bhavati hi taṃsadisesu tabbohāro, yathā sā eva tittiri, tāniyeva osadhānīti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannānanti jātānaṃ bhūtānaṃ nibbattāna’’nti. Sañcayato paṭṭhāya so dhātukkhobho samuṭṭhānaṃ etesanti taṃsamuṭṭhānā. ‘‘Dukkhavedanā’’ti vatvā sā akusalasabhāvāpi atthīti tato visesetuṃ ‘‘akusalavipākavedanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Byābādhanaṭṭhena byābādho, byābādhova byābajjhaṃ, dukkhanti attho. Natthi ettha byābajjhanti abyābajjhaṃ, niddukkhatā. Tenāha ‘‘abyābajjhaparamatāyā’’ti niddukkhaparamatāyāti. Taṃ dukkhanti roganimittakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
为了说明对衣服等资具的依止本身就是受用,先说了“依止它们、依靠它们”,然后又说“正在受用”。“存续着”就是活着。因为活着也就是存续,所以命根被称为“存续的作用”。巴利
Cīvarādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ nissayanaṃ paribhogo evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘te paṭicca nissāyā’’ti vatvā ‘‘paribhuñjamānā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pavattantīti jīvanti. Jīvanampi hi pavattanaṃ, yato jīvitindriyaṃ ‘‘pavattanarasa’’nti vuccati.
四种清净成就方法的注释巴利
Catupārisuddhisampādanavidhivaṇṇanā
19 19. 像这样,以巴帝摩卡防护等分类所解说的戒,为了再按成就之道的分别来显示,便开始了“evametasmiṃ”等文句。其中,“以此而成就、圆满”就是成就之道;“信是它的成就之道”,就是说以信为成就之道。难道没有精进、念和慧,巴帝摩卡防护也不能成就吗?确实不能成就,但这是就信作为殊胜之因来说的。为了显示这一点,便说:巴利
19. Evaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarādibhedena niddiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ puna sādhanavibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘evametasmi’’ntiādimāraddhaṃ. Tattha sādhīyati sampādiyati etenāti sādhanaṃ, saddhā sādhanaṃ etassāti saddhāsādhano. Nanu ca vīriyasatipaññāhipi vinā pātimokkhasaṃvaro na sijjhatīti? Saccaṃ na sijjhati, saddhāya pana visesahetubhāvaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttanti dassento āha
“超越弟子范畴的制立学处”这句话,说的是:当涉及重罪、轻罪等各种类型的事件发生时,针对每一种过失制定相应的学处,这叫做制立学处,不是弟子们所能涉及的领域,只有诸佛才能涉及。制立学处本身暂且不说,就连制立学处的时机,也不是弟子们所能涉及的,只有诸佛才能涉及。为了说明这一点,所以说道:“在这里,拒绝请求制立学处就是一个例证。”正如经文中所说:“舍利弗,你且等待;舍利弗,你且等待,如来自会知道那个时机。”这里的“ca”是集合的意思。由此应当理解,像“我们不制立未制立的,不废除已制立的,依照已制立的学处受持奉行”这类文句都被包含在内。所谓“以信心”,就是通过对导师和法的信仰而确立信心。意思是:连生命都不顾,更何况生活资具。巴利
‘‘Sāvakavisayātītattāsikkhāpadapaññattiyā’’ti. Garukalahukādibhede otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ tassa tassa aparādhassa anurūpaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ nāma sāvakānaṃ avisayo, buddhānaṃ eva visayo. Sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ tāva tiṭṭhatu, tassa kālopi nāma sāvakānaṃ avisayo, buddhānaṃ eva visayoti dassento ‘‘sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanapaṭikkhepo cettha nidassana’’nti āha. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamehi tvaṃ sāriputta, āgamehi tvaṃ sāriputta, tathāgatova tattha kālaṃ jānissatī’’ti (pārā. 21). Tattha ca-saddo samuccayattho. Tena ‘‘apaññattaṃ na paññapema, paññattaṃ na samucchindāma, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattāmā’’ti (pārā. 565) evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Saddhāyāti saddahanena satthari, dhamme ca saddhāya paccupaṭṭhāpanena. Jīvitepi pageva jīvitaparikkhāreti adhippāyo.
就像鹧鸪鸟护着自己的蛋一样。据说它宁可舍弃性命,也要保护自己的蛋。又像牦牛护着自己的尾巴一样。据说牦牛被猎人追赶时,宁可舍弃性命,也要保护自己挂在荆棘丛等处的尾巴。接着要接上“像爱独子一样”来理解:就像一位有独子的家主,对那个独子,又如只有一只眼睛的人对那只唯一的眼睛,格外地爱护。同样,守护戒律的人也是这样,这是出于悲悯而说的。极为可爱,就是非常可爱的习性。恒常,就是在一切时候,无论幼年、中年还是老年。由于具足六种恭敬,所以是有恭敬的人,意思就是具有深厚的恭敬。巴利
Kikīva aṇḍanti kikīsakuṇikā viya attano aṇḍaṃ. Sā kira jīvitampi pariccajitvā aṇḍameva rakkhati. Camarīva vāladhinti camarīmigo viya attano vāladhiṃ. Camarīmigā kira byādhena paripātiyamānā jīvitampi pariccajitvā kaṇḍakagumbādīsu laggaṃ attano vālameva rakkhanti. Piyaṃva puttaṃ ekakanti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yathā hi ekaputtako kuṭumbiko taṃ ekaputtaṃ, ekanayano ca taṃ ekanayanaṃ suṭṭhutaraṃ rakkhati. Tatheva sīlaṃ anurakkhamānakāti anukampanavasena vuttaṃ. Supesalāti suṭṭhu piyasīlā. Sadā sabbakālaṃ daharamajjhimatherakālesu. Channampi gāravānaṃ vasena sagāravā, garukāravantoti attho.
正是如此:就像大海安住于自己的法性,不会越过海岸线,同样地,“我的弟子们”这句话,是针对圣弟子们说的。因为他们戒行稳固。“在这个意义上”:就是说,即使为了活命,也不违越戒律。巴利
Evameva khoti yathā mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātikkamati, evameva. Mama sāvakāti ariyasāvake sandhāyāha. Te hi dhuvasīlā. Imasmiṃ attheti jīvitahetupi sīlassa avītikkamane.
名叫大行道林的就是频阇山林。有些人说,那是雪山一侧的森林。长老:指一位以姓名和家族都无从得知的长老。他们让他躺下后,说:你去以后,不要告诉任何人。巴利
Mahāvattaniaṭavī nāma viñjhāṭavī. Himavantapasse aṭavīti keci. Theranti nāmagottavasena apaññātaṃ ekaṃ theraṃ. Nipajjāpesuṃ gantvā kassaci mā āroceyyāti.
“腐藤”就是野葡萄藤。“等首”就是寿命等首。一个人的烦恼之头——无明,被依次第修成的阿拉汉道彻底断尽;然后他安住在第十九种省察智上,在越过有分时,轮回之头——命根,被死心彻底断尽。因为这两者的时机相等,他就被称为“寿命等首”。那位长老就是这样般涅槃的,所以说“成为等首而般涅槃”。据说无畏长老有大神通,因此有人说“他让人建造了塔”。“哪怕”的意思是:哪怕舍弃自己的生命,也绝不破坏,绝不违越。巴利
Pūtilatāyāti gaḷocilatāya. Samasīsīti jīvitasamasīsī. Yassa hi kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ maggapaṭipāṭiyā arahattamaggo pariyādiyati, tato ekūnavīsatime paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgottaraṇe vaṭṭasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati, so imāya vārasamatāya ‘‘jīvitasamasīsī’’ti vuccati. So ca thero tathā parinibbāyi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyī’’ti. Abhayatthero kira mahābhiñño. Tasmā cetiyaṃ kārāpesīti vadanti. Appevāti appeva nāma attano jīvitampi jaheyya, na bhindeti na bhindeyya, na vītikkameyya.
以正念决意守护的诸根,是指已经现起的正念,以守护之力所决意守护的诸根。不可被随逐,是指诸根作为门,不应被贪欲等烦恼所跟随。胜,就是最上。炽热的,就是热的。燃烧的,就是从最初开始就在燃烧。全面燃烧的,就是从四周都在燃烧。成为一团火焰的,就是变成一片火海。完全被触及的,就是彻底被触及、被遍覆。然而绝不是胜,应这样连接理解。于诸色,就是对于色所缘。随细相而取相,就是随着烦恼逐一依细相生起,以明显的方式执取美等相;或者,随细相就是从手足等细微特征,取相就是执取男女、美等相。于眼门等转起的,就是从眼门等处生起的。识,就是速行识。应当通过遮止取相等来完成,此为连接。如无设防的枝叶围绕,就是如同没有妥善设防的围墙所围绕。取他物者,就是取走他人财物的盗贼。完全穿透,就是全面穿透、侵入。巴利
Satiyāadhiṭṭhitānanti pageva upaṭṭhitāya satiyā ārakkhavasena adhiṭṭhitānaṃ indriyānaṃ. Ananvāssavanīyatoti dvārabhāvena abhijjhādīhi ananubandhitabbato. Varanti seṭṭhaṃ. Tattāyāti uṇhāya. Ādittāyāti ādito paṭṭhāya dittāya. Sampajjalitāyāti samantato jalantiyā. Sajotibhūtāyāti ekajālībhūtāya. Sampalimaṭṭhanti sabbaso āmaṭṭhaṃ, añcitanti attho. Na tveva varanti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Rūpesūti rūpārammaṇesu. Anubyañjanaso nimittaggāhoti kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanavasena uppādanena pākaṭīkaraṇavasena subhādinimittaggāho, atha vā anubyañjanasoti hatthapādādianubyañjanato, nimittaggāhoti itthipurisādisubhādinimittaggahaṇaṃ. Cakkhudvārādipavattassāti cakkhudvārādīhi pavattassa. Viññāṇassāti javanaviññāṇassa. Nimittādiggāhaṃ nisedhentena sampādetabboti sambandho. Asaṃvihitasākhāparivāranti sammā avihitavatiparikkhepaṃ. Parassahārīhīti parasantakāvahārakehi corehi. Samativijjhatīti sabbaso ativijjhati anupavisati.
在诸色中,就是以色为因、以色为相。应当这样连接:从所生的种种过患来说,要守护根门。其余几门也是这样。因为这些门——这些眼门等等——由于没有用念的门扇关好,所以是敞开的。正因为这样,它们才没有得到守护。由于它们是烦恼生起的原因,所以说它们杀害具足这些门的人,这只是借原因来作比喻的说法。或者,这些色等法是烦恼的所缘,眼门等是门。它们是怎样的呢?是敞开的、未受守护的,由于眼门等未加防护这一原因,而杀害具足它们的人,这也只是借原因来作比喻的说法。家,就是房屋。覆盖得不好的,就是没有好好覆盖。未修习的,就是不具备出世间修习。巴利
Rūpesūti rūpahetu rūpanimittaṃ. Uppajjanakaanatthato rakkha indriyanti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesu. Ete hi dvārāti ete cakkhādidvārā. Satikavāṭena asaṃvutattā vivaṭā. Tato eva arakkhitā. Kilesuppattiyā hetubhāvena taṃsamaṅginaṃ hanantīti kāraṇūpacāreneva vuttaṃ. Ete vā rūpādayo. Kilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā dvārā cakkhādidvārā. Te kīdisā vivaṭā arakkhitā asaṃvutacakkhādihetuṃ taṃsamaṅginaṃ hanantīti kāraṇūpacāreneva vuttaṃ. Agāranti gehaṃ. Ducchannanti na sammā chāditaṃ. Abhāvitanti lokuttarabhāvanārahitaṃ.
“应成就”等语,属于清净分,其含义应依照与前文相反的方式来理解。而这里说烦恼完全不生起,是极为殊胜的教示,因为它等同于已由道证得的状态。“应成就”,就是应当以“我从此不再这样做”的决意清净来成就。巴利
Sampāditetiādissa vodānapakkhassa attho vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana sabbaso kilesānaṃ anuppādo atiukkaṭṭhadesanā maggenāgatasadisattā. Sampādetabboti ‘‘na punevaṃ karissa’’nti adhiṭṭhānasuddhiyā sampādetabbo.
刚刚出家的人,意思就是出家不久、才刚出家。我被欲贪烧灼,就是我被欲贪之火所遍烧。为了说明这种烧灼现在已经到达心里,他说我的心正在遍烧。善哉是祈请。熄灭是指熄灭它的方法。乔达摩是以族姓来称呼这位长老。巴利
Adhunāpabbajitenāti na cirapabbajitena, navapabbajitenāti attho. Kāmarāgena ḍayhāmīti kāmarāgagginā pariḍayhāmi. So ca pana dāho idāni cittagatoti dassento āha ‘‘cittaṃ me pariḍayhatī’’ti. Sādhūti āyācanā. Nibbāpananti tassa nibbāpanupāyaṃ. Gotamāti theraṃ gottena ālapati.
所谓“想的颠倒”,就是指由于“在不净中看成净”这种想颠倒而生起的颠倒想之相。要避开什么样的相呢?要避开与贪欲相应、能成为贪欲生起的因的净相,不要对它作意。不只是不对净相作意,还要用不净的修习来修自己的心。怎么修呢?要让心专一、善巧地等持——就像在不净所缘上,因为没有散乱而专一,因为善巧地安住而等持,就要这样修。这样开示了通过止的修习来压伏欲贪之后,现在为了开示彻底断除的方法,才说了“诸行”等话。其中,“将诸行视为他者”,是指因为一切诸行都无法支配,所以看作“他者”;又因为无常、被生灭逼迫而看作苦;因为无我的自性、没有我而看作无我。这样加上三相之后,增长观修,依照道的次第,用第四道完全熄灭大贪——因为能征服三界、所缘广大,所以叫大贪——让它止息。就像现在这样,不要再被烧着了。他这样更坚定地劝导去除贪欲。巴利
Saññāyavipariyesāti ‘‘asubhe subha’’nti pavattasaññāvipariyesahetu viparītasaññānimittaṃ. Nimittaṃ parivajjehi kīdisaṃ? Rāgūpasañhitaṃ rāguppattihetubhūtaṃ subhanimittaṃ parivajjehi na manasi karohi. Na kevalaṃ subhanimittassāmanasikāro eva, atha kho asubhabhāvanāya attano cittaṃ bhāvehi. Kathaṃ? Ekaggaṃ susamāhitaṃ yathā taṃ asubhārammaṇe vikkhepābhāvena ekaggaṃ, suṭṭhu appitabhāvena susamāhitañca hoti, evaṃ bhāvehīti. Evaṃ samathabhāvanāya kāmarāgassa vikkhambhanaṃ dassetvā idāni samucchedanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhāre’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhāre parato passāti sabbepi saṅkhāre avidheyyakatāya ‘‘pare’’ti passa. Aniccatāya pana udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā dukkhato, anattasabhāvattā, attavirahato ca no attato passa. Evaṃ lakkhaṇattayaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento maggapaṭipāṭiyā catutthamaggena sabbaso nibbāpehi mahārāgaṃ tebhūmakassa abhibhavanato mahāvisayatāya mahārāgaṃ vūpasamehi. Yathā etarahi, evaṃ mā ḍayhittho punappunanti daḷhataraṃ rāgavinodane niyojesi.
像这样说明了根律仪戒圆满成就的方法之后,为了说明“这样它就算善加成就了”这一方法,接着用“再者”等话,举出在这件事上圆满践行的长老作为例子。其中“从没抬头看过洞窟”这句话,是因为长老在任何地方都只看着一轭那么远的距离。那么长老不打扫住处吗?因为确实说过“应该先把蜘蛛网去掉”,据说他的弟子等人替他打扫住处。这是那龙树的。巴利
Evaṃ indriyasaṃvarasīlassa sampādane vidhiṃ dassetvā evaṃ taṃ susampāditaṃ hotīti nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādinā tattha paripūrakārino there nidasseti. Tattha ‘‘leṇaṃ na ullokitapubba’’nti idaṃ sabbattheva therassa yugamattadassitāya vuttaṃ. Kiṃ pana thero senāsanaṃ na sodheti ? ‘‘Ullokā paṭhamaṃ ohāretabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ, antevāsikādayo eva kirassa senāsanaṃ sodhenti. Assa nāgarukkhassa.
在那个大村里。那些年轻妇女,是指有幼小子女需要哺乳的,是她们。令人加印,就是用布条绑住乳房后,用王印盖上。国王为了能多见长老一些时间而拖延,说:“明天我受戒。”长老在国王和王后向他礼敬时,只取七种相。但他不区分这是女人、这是男人,所以说“我不作分别”。他拿着灯杖站着,心想:“啊,这位尊者的戒行真是极其清净!”因为得到了合适的资具,业处变得极其清净、明显。让整座山发出回响,就是因地震而使整座山发出同一个响声;有些人说,是住在那里天神发出赞叹的缘故。恐惧,就是不安稳。愚者,指年幼的孩子。惊恐,就是因与亲属分离而生起的恐惧。巴利
Tasmiṃ gāmeti mahāgāme. Taruṇā thaññapivanakā puttadhītaro yāsaṃ tā taruṇaputtā, tāsaṃ. Lañjāpesīti thanapaṭṭikāya thane bandhāpetvā rājamuddikāya lañjāpesi. Rājā theraṃ cirataraṃ daṭṭhuṃ kālavikkhepaṃ karonto ‘‘sve sīlāni gaṇhissāmī’’ti āha. Thero rañño ca deviyā ca vandanakāle sattākāramattaṃ gaṇhāti. Itthī purisoti pana vivekaṃ na karoti. Tenāha ‘‘vavatthānaṃ na karomī’’ti. ‘‘Aho suparisuddhasīlo vatāyaṃ ayyo’’ti daṇḍadīpikaṃ gahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Atiparisuddhaṃ pākaṭanti sappāyalābhena kammaṭṭhānaṃ ativiya parisuddhaṃ vibhūtaṃ ahosi. Sakalaṃ pabbataṃ unnādayantoti pathavikampanena sakalaṃ pabbataṃ ekaṃ ninnādaṃ karonto. Tannivāsidevatānaṃ sādhukāradānenāti keci. Bhantoti anavaṭṭhito. Bāloti taruṇadārako. Utrastoti ñātakehi vinābhāvena santrasto.
“毒疮病”是指乳房肿痛这种病。也有人说,月经病等也叫毒疮病。“从出家时起”,意思是从出家那个时候开始。“诸根”,指的是根律仪戒。这些戒一旦被破坏,因为失去了防护,诸根也就被称为被破坏了;或者说,诸根本身是执取整体相和细节相的入口,因为给具有它们的人带来祸患,所以称为被破坏,反之则应知道是没被破坏。另有人说:对诸根作不恰当的把持就是破坏,恰当的把持就是不破坏。“友长老”,就像大友长老那样。“在殊胜的当中”,意思是最高妙的。巴利
Visagaṇḍakarogoti thanakandaḷarogamāha. Māsarogādikopi visagaṇḍakarogoti vadanti. Yato pabbajito, tato paṭṭhāya pabbajitakālato pabhutīti attho. Indriyānīti indriyasaṃvarasīlāni. Tesu hi bhinnesu indriyānipi bhinnānīti vuccanti ārakkhābhāvato, indriyāneva vā nimittānubyañjanaggāhassa dvārabhūtāni bhinnāni nāma taṃsamaṅgino anatthuppattito, vipariyāyato abhinnānīti veditabbāni. Indriyānaṃ vā ayoniso upasaṃhāro bhedanaṃ, yoniso upasaṃhāro abhedananti apare. Mittattherovāti mahāmittatthero viya. Vareti seṭṭhe.
“以如是精进”这里,是用“如是”这个词来特别说明精进。就像正念以无过失为特征,能成就根律仪;同样,精进也以无过失为特征,能成就活命清净。应当看到,这个修饰语只是针对精进说的。因此他说“正勤精进者”。“不适当的寻求”就是不正当的寻求,如前所说,它包括邪命。它本身不契合导师的教法,所以是“不契合”,也就是说,那种不正当的寻求是不契合的。或者也可以说,“不契合”就是与契合相违背:对于已受持头陀支的人来说,与头陀支规定相违背、能破坏任何人的少欲知足修行的,就是不契合。在这个解释中,“ca”这个词是省略而提及的,即“舍弃不正当的寻求和不契合之后”。与“受用、避开”相连,应当成就。通过“清净生起”这一句,就说明了法的开示等的生起是清净的,因此说“以法的开示等,以及他的功德,使那些欢喜的人”。以“等”这个词,应当知道包括了多闻、履行义务、行仪圆满等。在“对于他的头陀功德欢喜的人”这里,也是同样的道理。在“以乞食行等”这里,以“等”这个词,应当知道包括了与朋友、粪扫衣行等。在“随顺头陀支规定”这里,是指随顺于各种头陀支规定的修行,也就是不破坏的意思。邪命只是大欲者的活命方式,不是少欲者的。为了说明少欲达到极致时,邪命根本不可能存在,所以说了“能止息一种病”等。其中,“腐诃子”是指被腐烂的尿所浸泡的,或者是以腐烂的状态被丢弃的诃子。他有圣种,或者致力于圣种,所以是圣种者;因为远离对资具的贪著,所以是极上圣种者,即他既是极上的,又是圣种者。在“任何人的”这里,是指在已受持和未受持头陀支中,任何人的。巴利
Tathā vīriyenāti tathā-saddena vīriyaṃ viseseti. Yathā sati anavajjalakkhaṇāva indriyasaṃvarasādhanaṃ, tathā vīriyaṃ anavajjalakkhaṇaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisādhananti. Vīriyāpekkhameva visesanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sammāāraddhavīriyassā’’ti. Ayuttā esanā anesanā, yathāvuttamicchājīvasaṅgahā. Sā eva satthusāsanassa na patirūpāti appatirūpaṃ, taṃ anesanaṃ appatirūpaṃ. Atha vā patirūpavirodhinī appatirūpā, pariggahitadhutaṅgassa dhutaṅganiyamavirodhinī yassa kassaci sallekhavikopinī paṭipatti. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ca-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, anesanaṃ, appatirūpañca pahāyāti. Paṭisevamānena parivajjayatā sampādetabbāti sambandho. ‘‘Parisuddhuppāde’’ti imināva dhammadesanādīnaṃ parisuddhāya samuṭṭhānatā dīpitā hotīti ‘‘dhammadesanādīhi cassa guṇehi pasannāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena bāhusaccavattaparipūraṇairiyāpathasampattiādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dhutaguṇe cassa pasannānanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Piṇḍapātacariyādīhīti ādi-saddena mittasuhajjapaṃsukūlacariyādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Dhutaṅganiyamānulomenāti taṃtaṃdhutaṅganiyatāya paṭipattiyā anulomavasena, avikopanavasenāti attho. Mahicchasseva micchājīvena jīvikā, na appicchassa. Appicchatāya ukkaṃsagatāya micchājīvassa asambhavo evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekabyādhivūpasamattha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pūtiharitakīti pūtimuttaparibhāvitaṃ, pūtibhāvena vā chaḍḍitaṃ haritakaṃ. Ariyavaṃso etassa atthīti, ariyavaṃse vā niyuttoti ariyavaṃsiko, paccayagedhassa dūrasamussāritattā uttamo ca so ariyavaṃsiko cāti uttamaariyavaṃsiko. Yassa kassacīti pariggahitāpariggahitadhutaṅgesu yassa kassaci.
所谓“相”,就是针对诸缘,按照意图被人知道的方式去暗示,这就是相业。所谓“光明”,就是不直接说出来,而让意图清楚地显现出来,这就是光明说。所谓“周说”,就是间接地说。“如此生起”,是指以相等方式而生起。巴利
Nimittaṃ nāma paccaye uddissa yathā adhippāyo ñāyati evaṃ nimittakammaṃ. Obhāso nāma ujukameva akathetvā yathā adhippāyo vibhūto hoti, evaṃ obhāsanaṃ. Parikathā nāma pariyāyena kathanaṃ. Tathā uppannanti nimittādivasena uppannaṃ.
“门已开”的意思是:以生病为理由,受用之门已经打开。因此,即使在没有病的时候也可以受用,不会犯戒,这就是它的含义。所以经文说“虽然不犯戒”等等。“不可”是指对于安住在头陀行实践中的行者来说不可,会破坏头陀行,这是其意旨。他们说,通过“但会破坏活命”这一句就表明,对于持与坐卧处相关头陀支的行者,作暗示等是不可的。另一些长老则说,对于持其他头陀支的行者,同样也不可。“不作”是指在各自被开许的范围内也不作。“除非”是指除开。巴利
Dvāraṃ dinnanti rogasīsena paribhogassa dvāraṃ dinnaṃ. Tasmā arogakālepi paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, āpatti na hotīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘kiñcāpi āpatti na hotī’’tiādi. Na vaṭṭatīti sallekhapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitassa na vaṭṭati, sallekhaṃ kopetīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ājīvaṃ pana kopetī’’ti imināva senāsanapaṭisaṃyuttadhutaṅgadharassa nimittādayo na vaṭṭantīti vadanti. Tadaññadhutaṅgadharassāpi na vaṭṭantiyevāti apare. Akarontoti yathāsakaṃ anuññātavisayepi akaronto. Aññatrevāti ṭhapetvā eva.
这位大长老舍弃了与众人共住的生活,住在森林僻静处,安住在止息远离的最高境界——最上的果等至,因此被称为“倡导远离者”。依于腹部的风病,就是腹风病。没有掺水的牛奶,叫未掺水牛奶;用那煮成的乳粥,就是未掺水牛乳粥,意思是用不掺水的纯牛奶煮成的乳粥。这乳粥的由来因缘,长老自己曾说出:“贤友,我在家时,母亲用酥、蜜、糖等调和,给我未掺水的牛乳粥,我因此感到舒适。”为什么说“不应浪费的团食”呢?难道长老没有光耀等心生起吗?确实没有。但有些不知他内心意乐的凡夫可能会那样想,而且未来的同梵行者可能会跟着我这样的看法走,所以他拒绝了。再者,大长老的头陀行已经达到极致。正如因为那位年少比丘“谁得到圆满而不欢喜”这句话,他直到般涅槃都不吃硬食。巴利
Gaṇavāsaṃ pahāya araññāyatane paṭippassaddhivivekassa muddhabhūtāya aggaphalasamāpattiyā viharanto mahāthero ‘‘pavivekaṃ brūhayamāno’’ti vutto. Udarasannissito vātābādho udaravātābādho. Asambhinnaṃ khīraṃ etassāti asambhinnakhīraṃ, tadeva pāyāsanti asambhinnakhīrapāyāsaṃ, udakena asammissakhīrena pakkapāyāsanti attho. Tassāti pāyāsassa. Uppattimūlanti ‘‘gihikāle me, āvuso, mātā sappimadhusakkarādīhi yojetvā asambhinnakhīrapāyāsaṃ adāsi, tena me phāsu ahosī’’ti attano vacīnicchāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ uppattihetuṃ. ‘‘Aparibhogāraho piṇḍapāto’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu therassa obhāsanādicittuppattiyeva natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, ajjhāsayaṃ pana ajānantā ekacce puthujjanā tathā maññeyyuṃ, anāgate ca sabrahmacārino evaṃ mama diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjeyyunti paṭikkhipi. Apica mahātherassa paramukkaṃsagatā sallekhapaṭipatti. Tathā hi daharabhikkhuno ‘‘kassa sampannaṃ na manāpa’’nti (pāci. 209, 257, 612, 1228, 1234; cūḷava. 343) vacanaṃ nissāya yāva parinibbānā piṭṭhakhādanīyaṃ na khādati.
语表之扩散是指发出言语的原因。为了表达意义而生起的声音,即使没有表露,当它由某种缘而成为缘时,就是仅依语表而转起,所以称为语表之扩散。已食就是已食者,若我成为已食者。彼是指他的。这里省略了a这个音素来表述,就像evaṃsa te等例子那样。内肠就是肠子的盘绕。若外出是指从住处出去,为了乞食而行走在外。为了显示极少的欲求,就按世间的说法这样讲。在世间,人们谴责不如法饮食的贪食者时,会这样说:他的肠子怎么会在外面游走呢?我能令满意是指从一开始就能令其满意,令其随顺己意,这就是它的含义。巴利
Vacīviññattivipphārāti vacīnicchāraṇahetu. Atthaviññāpanavasena pavattamāno hi saddo asatipi viññattiyā tassa kenaci paccayena paccayabhāve vacīviññattivaseneva pavattatīti ‘‘vacīviññattivipphāro’’ti vuccati. Bhuttoti bhuttavā sace bhaveyyaṃ ahaṃ. Sāti assa. Akāralopena hi niddeso ‘‘evaṃsa te’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58; 8.7) viya. Antaguṇanti antabhogo. Bahi careti āsayato nikkhamitvā gocaraggahaṇavasena bahi yadi vicareyya. Paramappicchaṃ dassetuṃ lokavohārenevamāha. Loke hi ayuttabhojanaṃ odariyaṃ garahantā evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃsu nāma tassa antāni bahi carantī’’ti. Ārādhemīti ādito paṭṭhāya rādhemi, vase vattemīti attho.
据说,大提舍长老在饥荒时期赶路,因为断了饭食,又加上旅途劳累,身体疲惫虚弱,就躺在一棵结了果的芒果树下,许多芒果散落在各处。这时,一位年纪较大的近事男走到长老身边,知道他累了,就给他喝芒果汁,然后把他背在背上,带他回住处。长老——巴利
Mahātissatthero kira dubbhikkhakāle maggaṃ gacchanto bhattacchedena, maggakilamathena ca kilantakāyo dubbalo aññatarassa phalitassa ambassa mūle nipajji, bahūni ambaphalāni tahaṃ tahaṃ patitāni honti. Tattheko vuḍḍhataro upāsako therassa santikaṃ upagantvā parissamaṃ ñatvā ambapānaṃ pāyetvā attano piṭṭhiṃ āropetvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ neti. Thero –
不是父亲,也不是你的母亲,不是亲族,也不是眷属;
为了具戒者而做这样的事。巴利
‘‘Na pitā napi te mātā, na ñāti napi bandhavo; Karotetādisaṃ kiccaṃ, sīlavantassa kāraṇā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.20) –
他先教诫自己,然后开始观照思惟,增长观智,就跟随在他身后,依照道次第证得了阿拉汉果。针对这件事,才说“这里也应该讲食芒果者大提舍长老的故事”。“以一切方式”是指以一切种类,也就是以邪命的方式、以心生起的方式,更何况以身、语躁动的方式。因此说“以邪命”等。巴利
Attānaṃ ovaditvā sammasanaṃ ārabhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tassa piṭṭhigato eva maggapaṭipāṭiyā arahattaṃ sacchākāsi. Imaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ambakhādakamahātissattheravatthupi cettha kathetabba’’nti. Sabbathāpīti sabbappakārenapi anesanavasena, cittuppattivasenapi, pageva kāyavacīvipphanditavasenāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘anesanāyā’’tiādi.
没有省察就受用资具,会带来负债受用、犯戒等过患;反过来,省察之后受用,则有功德。把这些过患和功德显示出来,就是“过患与功德的显示”。又因为这里讲的是资具方面的事,所以经文说“于资具”。其实,原因的原因(间接因)也可以就用“因”这个说法来表达,比如“用草煮成的饭”这样说。为了让人们明白:如果比丘避免了那种没有省察就受用的情况,那么依靠资具而持的戒就能成就、清净,所以说“因此”等话。其中,“对资具的贪着”这一说法里,通过“贪着”这个词,也应该知道已经包含了痴,因为痴与贪一起生起,而且痴是贪的近依。 “如法、平等所得”这一句,是显示资具来源的清净,不是显示依止资具戒的清净。因为,先了解资具的用途再受用,这才是依止资具戒。然而,那些资具必须是比丘以正当方式得到的,才可以受用,所以说“如法、平等所得的资具”。按照所说的方式,也就是“为了抵御寒冷”等所说的方式。巴利
Apaccavekkhitaparibhoge iṇaparibhogaāpattiādīnavassa, tabbipariyāyato paccavekkhitaparibhoge ānisaṃsassa ca dassanaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsadassanaṃ. Tassa pana paccayādhikārattā vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayesū’’ti. Kāraṇakāraṇampi hi kāraṇabhāvena vuccati yathā tiṇehi bhattaṃ siddhanti. Yena kāraṇena bhikkhuno apaccavekkhitaparibhogo nāma siyā, tasmiṃ vajjite paccayasannissitasīlaṃ sijjhati, visujjhati cāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paccayagedhanti gedhaggahaṇeneva sammohopi gahitoti daṭṭhabbo tena saha pavattanato, tadupanissayato ca. Dhammena samena uppanneti idaṃ paccayānaṃ āgamanasuddhidassanaṃ, na paccayasannissitasīlavisuddhidassanaṃ. Paccayānaṃ hi idamatthitaṃ upadhāretvā paribhuñjanaṃ paccayasannissitasīlaṃ. Yasmā pana te paccayā ñāyādhigatā eva bhikkhunā paribhuñjitabbā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammena samena uppanne paccaye’’ti. Yathāvuttena vidhināti ‘‘sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58; mahāni. 206) vuttavidhinā.
按界作意,是指这样作意于界:“这依缘而运转的,只是界而已,也就是衣等物,以及受用这些的人。”或者,是以不净作意:对抟食这类食物,先以“食不净想”来作意;或者想:“所有这些衣等物本身并不令人厌恶,可一旦接触到这臭秽的身体,就变得极其令人厌恶。”这样以不净作意。此后,是指从获得之后开始。无过失的受用,就像最初已经用智慧审查清楚、然后决定放置的钵和衣等物一样。这是通过省察来显示最初的清净,并不是要禁止受用时作省察。所以说“即使在受用时”等等。其中,是指在受用时作省察。能作决定,就是没有疑惑、确定无疑。巴利
Dhātuvasenavāti ‘‘yathāpaccayaṃ vattamānaṃ dhātumattamevetaṃ, yadidaṃ cīvarādi, tadupabhuñjako ca puggalo’’ti evaṃ dhātumanasikāravasena vā. Paṭikūlavasena vāti piṇḍapāte tāva āhāre paṭikūlasaññāvasena, ‘‘sabbāni pana imāni cīvarādīni ajigucchanīyāni, imaṃ pūtikāyaṃ patvā ativiya jigucchanīyāni jāyantī’’ti evaṃ paṭikūlamanasikāravasena vā. Tato uttarīti paṭilābhakālato upari. Anavajjovaparibhogo āditova paññāya parisodhitattā adhiṭṭhahitvā ṭhapitapattacīvarānaṃ viyāti. Paccavekkhaṇāya ādisuddhidassanaparametaṃ, na paribhogakāle paccavekkhaṇapaṭikkhepaparaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paribhogakālepī’’tiādi. Tatrāti tasmiṃ paribhogakāle paccavekkhaṇe. Sanniṭṭhānakaroti asandehakaro ekantiko.
所谓“盗用”,就是没有资格的人受用。世尊在自己的教法里,只允许持戒的人受用资具,不允许破戒的人受用。施主们也只布施给持戒的人,不布施给破戒的人,因为他们希望自己的布施能产生大果报。所以,由于导师不允许,施主也没有布施给他,破戒的人受用资具就如同偷盗一样,这叫盗用。以负债的方式受用,叫负债受用,意思是:因为受用者得不到清净的供养,就像借了债来受用一样。因此,“持戒的人”等话,是以理由的方式重新指出前面已经说过的意思。把衣服从身上解下来后,每次受用时,都应在饭前……乃至……后夜时分作省察,这是前后关联。如果做不到这样,就按前面所说的时间差别,在一天中作四次、三次、两次或仅仅一次省察。如果黎明升起时还没有省察,就停留在负债受用的状态。昨天我受用的衣服,仅仅是为了抵挡寒冷……乃至……遮蔽羞处。昨天我受用的抟食,如果不作“不是为了嬉戏”等对过去受用的省察,有人说这样就不能成立,这一点应该考察。床座也是在每次受用时,也就是每次进入时省察。念为缘,是指念是受持的缘,而省察的念是受用的缘,这样说是合理的,意思是:应该先省察再受持、再受用。因此说“作念之后”等等。即使两处都应该省察,即便如此,另有人说:念为缘,是指念是受用药物时的缘,即念为缘的意思。即使如此,也是指有缘时有念。这只是他们的见解而已。因为实际上,依缘而立的戒是通过省察而清净的,不是仅凭缘本身的存在。巴利
Theyyaparibhogo nāma anarahassa paribhogo. Bhagavatāpi attano sāsane sīlavato paccayā anuññātā, na dussīlassa. Dāyakānampi sīlavato eva pariccāgo, na dussīlassa. Attano kārānaṃ mahapphalabhāvassa paccāsīsanato. Iti satthārā ananuññātattā, dāyakehi ca apariccattattā dussīlassa paribhogo theyyāya paribhogo theyyaparibhogo. Iṇavasena paribhogo iṇaparibhogo, paṭiggāhakato dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyā abhāvato iṇaṃ gahetvā paribhogo viyāti attho. Tasmāti ‘‘sīlavato’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasati. Cīvaraṃ kāyato mocetvā paribhoge paribhoge purebhatta…pe… pacchimayāmesu paccavekkhitabbanti sambandho. Tathā asakkontena yathāvuttakālavisesavasena ekadivase catukkhattuṃ tikkhattuṃ dvikkhattuṃ sakiṃyeva vā paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Sace aruṇaṃ uggacchati, iṇaparibhogaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Hiyyo yaṃ mayā cīvaraṃ paribhuttaṃ, taṃ yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāya…pe… hirikopīnapaṭicchādanatthaṃ. Hiyyo yo mayā piṇḍapāto paribhutto, so ‘‘neva davāyā’’tiādinā sace atītaparibhogapaccavekkhaṇaṃ na kareyyāti vadanti, taṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Senāsanampi paribhoge paribhogeti pavese pavese. Satipaccayatāti satiyā paccayabhāvo paṭiggahaṇassa, paribhogassa ca paccavekkhaṇasatiyā paccayabhāvo yujjati, paccavekkhitvāva paṭiggahetabbaṃ, paribhuñjitabbañcāti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘satiṃ katvā’’tiādi. Evaṃ santepīti yadipi dvīsupi ṭhānesu paccavekkhaṇā yuttā, evaṃ santepi. Apare panāhu – sati paccayatāti sati bhesajjaparibhogassa paccayabhāve, sati paccayeti attho. Evaṃ santepīti paccaye satipīti. Taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Tathā hi paccayasannissitasīlaṃ paccavekkhaṇāya visujjhati, na paccayassa bhāvamattena.
这样显示了依缘所依止的戒清净之后,就借着这个机缘,为了显示一切清净而说“清净确实有四种”等。其中,依此而清净,所以叫清净,也就是如法开示本身就是清净,这叫开示清净。在这里,出罪也应当看作摄属于开示之中。至于断根罪,承认自己不再是比丘,这本身就是开示。以决意为殊胜的防护本身就是清净,这叫防护清净。以如法、平等的方式寻求资具本身就是清净,这叫遍求清净。在四种资具中,按照所说的方式省察本身就是清净,这叫省察清净。以上就是各种清净的概要。在具有清净的类别中,以开示为清净,这叫开示清净。其余的也照这样类推。清净这个词,就是前面所说的意思。如此,是就防护的差别而说的。断除,就是舍弃、不作的意思。巴利
Evaṃ paccayasannissitasīlassa visuddhiṃ dassetvā teneva pasaṅgena sabbāpi visuddhiyo dassetuṃ ‘‘catubbidhā hi suddhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sujjhati etāyāti suddhi, yathādhammaṃ desanāva suddhi desanāsuddhi. Vuṭṭhānassāpi cettha desanāya eva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Chinnamūlāpattīnaṃ pana abhikkhutāpaṭiññāva desanā. Adhiṭṭhānavisiṭṭho saṃvarova suddhi saṃvarasuddhi. Dhammena samena paccayānaṃ pariyeṭṭhi eva suddhi pariyeṭṭhisuddhi. Catūsupi paccayesu vuttavidhinā paccavekkhaṇāva suddhi paccavekkhaṇasuddhi. Esa tāva suddhīsu samāsanayo. Suddhimantesu pana desanā suddhi etassāti desanāsuddhi. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Suddhi-saddo pana vuttanayova. Evanti saṃvarabhedaṃ sandhāyāha. Pahāyāti vajjetvā, akatvāti attho.
以应当施与的意义,它是遗产;领受它的人,就是遗产继承人。因为对于未被允许的资具,完全不能受用;而受用只可能发生在已被允许的资具上,所以比丘们所受用的资具,其实是属于世尊的。世尊这样说:“诸比丘,你们要成为我的法继承人,不要成为财物继承人。我对你们有慈悯:怎样才能让我的弟子们成为法继承人,而不是财物继承人呢?”在这里,这部《法继承人经》正好能说明这个道理。巴利
Dātabbaṭṭhena dāyaṃ, taṃ ādiyantīti dāyādā. Ananuññātesu sabbena sabbaṃ paribhogābhāvato, anuññātesu eva ca paribhogasambhavato bhikkhūhi paribhuñjitabbapaccayā bhagavato santakā. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha mā āmisadāyādā. Atthi me tumhesu anukampā ‘kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṃ no āmisadāyādā’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.29) evaṃ pavattaṃ dhammadāyādasuttañca ettha etasmiṃ atthe sādhakaṃ.
未离贪的人因为被渴爱控制,在受用资具时没有自主权;由于没有那种被渴爱控制的状态,离贪的人在这方面才有自主,因为他们能随自己的意愿受用。就像这样,他们把可厌的东西以不可厌的方式看待,把不可厌的东西以可厌的方式看待,两者都抛开,以旁观舍心的方式受用资具,同时满足施主的心愿。因此说:“他们因为已经超越了渴爱的奴役,所以成为主人而受用。”巴利
Avītarāgānaṃ taṇhāparavasatāya paccayaparibhoge sāmibhāvo natthi, tadabhāvena vītarāgānaṃ tattha sāmibhāvo yathāruciparibhogasambhavato. Tathā hi te paṭikūlampi appaṭikūlākārena, appaṭikūlampi paṭikūlākārena, tadubhayampi vajjetvā ajjhupekkhanākārena paccaye paribhuñjanti, dāyakānañca manorathaṃ paripūrenti. Tenāha ‘‘te hi taṇhāya dāsabyaṃ atītattā sāmino hutvā paribhuñjantī’’ti.
“一切”是指诸圣者和凡夫。凡夫怎么也能有这些受用呢?以借用之说而言。因为即使是凡夫,只要安住在减损烦恼的修行中,舍弃对资具的贪爱,在种种境况下以不染着的心来受用,这种受用就如同主人自己的受用一样。而持戒者经过省察的受用,则如同继承遗产的受用,因为不违背施主的心愿。正如经中所说:“或者也可归入遗产受用。”善凡夫的受用就更不必说了,因为他属于有学众。有学经能证明这个道理,所以说“持戒者也是如此”等等。从相反的角度来说:就像欠债的人不能随自己的意愿去想去的地方,被负债式受用所束缚的人也不能从世间解脱出来;与此相反,持戒者经过省察的受用就是无债的受用,所以说“或是无债受用”。由此表明,从严格意义上说,这种受用是超脱四种受用而单独成立的。依此学,就是依名为戒的学。作应作之事的人,因为随顺自己的承诺而行,所以成为合乎职责、如法而行的人。巴利
Sabbesanti ariyānaṃ, puthujjanānañca. Kathaṃ puthujjanānaṃ ime paribhogā sambhavanti? Upacāravasena. Yo hi puthujjanassāpi sallekhapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitassa paccayagedhaṃ pahāya tattha tattha anupalittena cittena paribhogo, so sāmiparibhogo viya hoti. Sīlavato pana paccavekkhitaparibhogo dāyajjaparibhogo viya hoti, dāyakānaṃ manorathassa avirādhanato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘dāyajjaparibhogeyeva vā saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’ti. Kalyāṇaputhujjanassa paribhoge vattabbameva natthi, tassa sekkhasaṅgahato. Sekkhasuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.13) hetassatthassa sādhakaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sīlavāpihī’’tiādi. Paccanīkattāti yathā iṇāyiko attano ruciyā icchitadesaṃ gantuṃ na labhati, evaṃ iṇaparibhogayutto lokato nissarituṃ na labhatīti tappaṭipakkhattā sīlavato paccavekkhitaparibhogo āṇaṇyaparibhogoti āha ‘‘āṇaṇyaparibhogo vā’’ti. Etena nippariyāyato catuparibhogavinimutto visuṃyevāyaṃ paribhogoti dasseti. Imāya sikkhāyāti sīlasaṅkhātāya sikkhāya. Kiccakārīti paṭiññānurūpaṃ paṭipajjanato yuttapattakārī.
现在,为了用经文语句说明那件已经做好的事,就说了“这也是已经说过的”等话。其中,“住处”指住所。“床座”指床等。这两者其实都只是指卧具。“水”指饮用水。“洗掉僧伽梨上的尘垢”指清洗僧伽梨上沾的尘土等污垢。“听闻善逝所说的法之后”是指:对于衣服等资具,按照“经过审察,如理地受用衣服,只是为了抵挡寒冷……”这样的方式,听闻世尊所说的法之后。“具上智的弟子审察后受用”是指:对于以“团食”所说的抟食、以“住处”等词所说的卧具、以“为了止息渴病,饮水也属于病缘”这样从水这一项显示出来的病缘,以及僧伽梨等衣服——对这四种资具,按照“只是为了维持这个身体……”这样的方式审察之后。能够这样受用的人,就是具上智的世尊弟子,或者是有学,或者是凡夫。巴利
Idāni tameva kiccakāritaṃ suttapadena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vihāranti patissayaṃ. Sayanāsananti mañcādiṃ. Ubhayenapi senāsanameva vuttaṃ. Āpanti udakaṃ. Saṅghāṭirajūpavāhananti paṃsumalādino saṅghāṭigatarajassa dhovanaṃ. Sutvāna dhammaṃ sugatena desitanti cīvarādīsu ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paṭisevati sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58; mahāni. 206) nayena bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā. Saṅkhāya seve varapaññasāvakoti ‘‘piṇḍa’’nti vuttaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ, vihārādipadehi vuttaṃ senāsanaṃ, ‘‘pipāsāgelaññassa vūpasamanato pānīyampi gilānapaccayo’’ti āpamukhena dassitaṃ gilānapaccayaṃ, saṅghāṭiyādicīvaranti catubbidhaṃ paccayaṃ saṅkhāya ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; 2.24; 3.75; saṃ. ni. 4.120; a. ni. 6.58; 8.9; dha. sa. 1355) nayena paccavekkhitvā. Seve sevituṃ sakkuṇeyya uttamapaññassa bhagavato sāvako sekho vā puthujjano vā.
因为具上智的弟子是经过省察才受用的,所以在抟食上……中略……就像荷叶上的水珠一样,也是如此。“适时”是指在诸圣者进食的时间。“得”是指得到之后。“从他”是指从别的施主那里。“出于慈愍”是指出于悲悯。当大量食物被送来时,他应当知道适量,应当了知,恒常地、一切时候都保持正念现前。“如涂药愈合”是指像用药膏涂抹使伤口愈合那样,应当知道适量——这是句子的连接方式。“应取”是指应当取用。或者读作“应取用食物”。“为延续”是指为了身体的延续。“不迷惑”是指不被渴爱所迷惑,不陷入贪着和渴爱。巴利
Yasmā ca saṅkhāya sevī varapaññasāvako, tasmā hi piṇḍe…pe… pokkhare vāribindu, tathā hoti. Kālenāti ariyānaṃ bhojanakāle. Laddhāti labhitvā. Paratoti aññato dāyakato. Anuggahāti anukampāya bahumhi upanīte mattaṃ so jaññā jāneyya satataṃ sabbakālaṃ upaṭṭhito upaṭṭhitassati. Ālepanarūhane yathāti bhesajjalepanena vaṇassa ruhane viya, mattaṃ jāneyyāti yojanā. Āhareti āhareyya. ‘‘Āhareyyāhāra’’nti vā pāṭho. Yāpanatthanti sarīrassa yāpanāya. Amucchitoti taṇhāmucchāya amucchito gedhaṃ taṇhaṃ anāpanno.
因为他的名字是取自他自己的舅父僧护长老,所以叫外甥僧护沙弥。“稻米粥”就是米饭。“极清凉”就是非常清凉。说“不节制”,是针对没有省察而说的。“已断尽一切漏”就是已经断尽了一切烦恼。巴利
Attano mātulassa saṅgharakkhitattherasseva nāmassa gahitattā bhāgineyyasaṅgharakkhitasāmaṇero. Sālikūranti sālibhattaṃ. Sunibbutanti susītalaṃ. Asaññatoti apaccavekkhaṇaṃ sandhāyāha. Sabbāsavaparikkhīṇoti parikkhīṇasabbāsavo.
第一戒五法的注释巴利
Paṭhamasīlapañcakavaṇṇanā
20 20. 这些有边际,所以叫“有边际”;以有边际的学处为戒的人,就是“有边际学处者”,这里说的是有边际学处者。“已受具足戒者”,是指除了善凡夫、有学、无学之外的其他已受具足戒者。因为即使在说明沙门性的共同特征时,也要依据个别情况来安立。“致力于善法者”,是指致力于观行修习的人。“有学边际”,是指以有学法为边际、为最高界限。从分辨名色开始,或者从受持善法开始,一直到种姓智为止,这期间生起的善法相续,触及有学法而住,就是有学边际。或者,有学法的下分——应当修学的三种世间学,就是有学边际,即在那有学边际中。“圆满行者”,是指不遗漏任何一学而圆满修习者。为了证得上位殊胜,对身与命都无所顾惜。正因如此,为了戒的圆满而舍身命。由于不以见杂染执取,所以是具足清净的戒,即“不执取清净戒”。由于诸烦恼完全止息而具足清净的戒,即“止息清净戒”。巴利
20. Pariyanto etesaṃ atthīti pariyantāni, pariyantāni sikkhāpadāni yesaṃ te pariyantasikkhāpadā, tesaṃ pariyantasikkhāpadānaṃ. Upasampannānanti ṭhapetvā kalyāṇaputhujjanasekkhāsekkhe tadaññesaṃ upasampannānaṃ. Sāmaññajotanāpi hi visese tiṭṭhati. Kusaladhamme yuttānanti vipassanācāre yuttapayuttānaṃ. Sekkhadhammā pariyantā paramā mariyādā etassāti sekkhapariyanto. Nāmarūpaparicchedato, kusaladhammasamādānato vā pana paṭṭhāya yāva gotrabhū, tāva pavattakusaladhammappabandho sekkhadhamme āhacca ṭhito sekkhapariyanto. Sekkhadhammānaṃ vā heṭṭhimantabhūtā sikkhitabbā lokiyā tisso sikkhā sekkhapariyanto, tasmiṃ sekkhapariyante. Paripūrakārīnanti kiñcipi sikkhaṃ ahāpetvā pūrentānaṃ. Uparivisesādhigamatthaṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhānaṃ. Tato eva sīlapāripūriatthaṃ pariccattajīvitānaṃ. Diṭṭhisaṃkilesena aparāmasanīyato pārisuddhivantaṃ sīlaṃ aparāmaṭṭhapārisuddhisīlaṃ. Kilesānaṃ sabbaso paṭippassaddhiyā pārisuddhivantaṃ sīlaṃ paṭippassaddhipārisuddhisīlaṃ.
未受具足戒的人、无学的人、有学的人以及善凡夫的戒,因为具有大威力,从威力方面来说是无边际的,所以说“从数目来说是有边际的”。因为守护身语、调伏身语,所以叫“防护调伏”。以略说方式被开示的,是依照导师在各处广说时所讲的方式,按所说的数目来开示的。“学”就是指戒这个意义上的学。“于律防护中”是指在律藏中。从数目来说是有边际的,已受具足戒者的戒——这里要把下文所说的内容接过来理解。凡是已受具足戒的人应当学的戒,对任何人来说都是毫无遗漏、没有剩余的。“受持的状态”是指受持的存在。得……等,以……方式,无边际的状态,是指不因为利得等原因而违犯戒。巴利
Anupasampannānaṃ asekkhānaṃ, sekkhānaṃ, kalyāṇaputhujjanānañca sīlaṃ mahānubhāvatāya ānubhāvato apariyantamevāti āha ‘‘gaṇanavasena sapariyantattā’’ti. Kāyavācānaṃ saṃvaraṇato, vinayanato ca saṃvaravinayā. Peyyālamukhena niddiṭṭhāti tattha tattha satthārā desitavitthāranayena yathāvuttagaṇanato niddiṭṭhā. Sikkhāti sīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā. Vinayasaṃvareti vinayapiṭake. Gaṇanavasena sapariyantampi upasampannānaṃ sīlanti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci hi upasampannena sikkhitabbaṃ sīlaṃ nāma, tattha kassacipi anavasesato anavasesavasena. Samādānabhāvanti samādānasabbhāvaṃ. Lābha…pe… vasena adiṭṭhapariyantabhāvo lābhādihetu sīlassa avītikkamo.
为了守护身体,即使被强盗等威胁逼迫,也要舍弃财物。为了保护生命,在遭蛇咬等危急时刻,要舍弃身体。一个人随念法时,就像须达须摩大菩萨等人那样,身体、财物和生命全都可以舍弃。因此说“不舍弃这善士随念”。即使因为饥饿疲惫而生命垂危,也不违犯学处:就像无主的芒果掉在地上,虽然就在旁边,但因为没有人接受,所以不吃,不违犯接受食物的学处。巴利
Dhanaṃ caje aṅgavarassa hetu pāripanthikacorādīhi upadduto. Aṅgaṃ caje jīvitaṃ rakkhamāno sappadaṭṭhādikāle. Aṅgaṃ dhanaṃ jīvitañcāpi sabbaṃ, caje naro dhammamanussaranto sutasomamahābodhisattādayo viya. Tenāha ‘‘imaṃ sappurisānussatiṃ avijahanto’’ti. Jighacchāparissamena jīvitasaṃsaye satipi. Sikkhāpadaṃ avītikkammāti assāmikesu ambaphalesu bhūmiyaṃ patitesu samīpeyeva santesupi paṭiggāhakābhāvena aparibhuñjanto paṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ avītikkamitvā.
“持戒者”是指因为具备持戒者这一状态的缘故;或者,是指对持戒的你,做像用肩膀扛运这一类的事,意思是因戒的缘故。就像在四块石头上好好洗净的天然宝石一样。就像大僧护长老和他的外甥僧护长老一样。意思是:大众会产生“我们来这里是为了什么”的后悔。以弹指。由于失念。因无知而做:指因为无知而犯了错才做的,也就是在不知道的情况下做的。巴利
Sīlavantassāti sīlavantabhāvassa kāraṇā, sīlavantassa vā tuyhaṃ etādisaṃ aṃsena vāhaṇādikaṃ kiccaṃ karoti, kāraṇā sīlassāti adhippāyo. Sudhotajātimaṇi viyāti catūsu pāsāṇesu sammadeva dhotajātimaṇi viya. Mahāsaṅgharakkhitabhāgineyyasaṅgharakkhitattherānaṃ viyāti mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa, tasseva bhāgineyyasaṅgharakkhitattherassa viya ca. ‘‘Kimatthaṃ mayaṃ idhāgatā’’ti mahājanassa vippaṭisāro bhavissatīti adhippāyo. Accharikāyāti aṅguliphoṭanena. Asatiyāti satisammosena. Aññāṇapakatanti aññāṇena aparajjhitvā kataṃ, ajānitvā katanti attho.
即使一个人很少听闻教法,意思是说,他远离了契经、应颂等教法。即使他在戒上并不安住,意思是说,他并没有在巴帝摩卡防护等戒上正确地建立自己。他不能成就所闻,意思是说,这个没有戒行的人的听闻,无论是自己的,还是他人的,在任何地方都不能带来生命的成就。因为那些想要修学的人不会去亲近他,心想:这个人是个恶戒者。即使多闻,这里的 ce 只是个语气词。被称赞,就是确实被称赞。巴利
Appassutopi ce hotīti suttageyyādisutarahito hoti ce. Sīlesu asamāhitoti pātimokkhasaṃvarādisīlesupi na sammā patiṭṭhito hoti ce. Nāssa sampajjate sutanti assa sīlarahitassa puggalassa sutaṃ attano, paresañca katthaci bhavasampattiāvahaṃ na hoti. ‘‘Dussīloyaṃ purisapuggalo’’ti hi sikkhākāmā na tassa santikaṃ upasaṅkamanti. Bahussutopi ceti ettha ce-ti nipātamattaṃ. Pasaṃsitoti pasaṃsito eva nāma.
以贪欲之力、以未被执取的执取方式,说明没有渴爱执取。“如是者”:即不被贪欲之力所执取。“打破”:即摧毁。“我将告知”:即我要让人知道,意思是“请让我离开一会儿”。“我厌离”:即我厌恶。“我羞惭”:即我羞愧。巴利
Rāgavasena aparāmaṭṭhagahaṇena taṇhāparāmāsābhāvamāha. Tathārūpanti rāgavasena aparāmaṭṭhaṃ. Bhinditvāti hanitvā. Saññapessāmīti saññattiṃ karissāmi, appakaṃ velaṃ maṃ vissejjetunti adhippāyo. Aṭṭiyāmīti jigucchāmi. Harāyāmīti lajjāmi.
陷在泥里:就是沉下去,或者被彻底涂满。我要和戒一起死去:意思是不破坏戒,和戒一起死去,从今以后任何时候都不舍弃它。因为如果执取有,就可能和戒分离,所以他的意思是“我将不执取有”。观察病:就是以受为入口,把握了像病一样的受,以及其余的非色法和色法之后,正在修观。巴利
Palipannoti sīdanto, sammakkhito vā. Sīleneva saddhiṃ marissāmīti sīlaṃ avināsento tena saheva marissāmi, na idāni kadācipi taṃ pariccajissāmi. Sati hi bhavādāne sīlena viyogo siyā, bhavameva nādiyissāmīti adhippāyo. Rogaṃ sammasantoti rogabhūtaṃ vedanaṃ vedanāmukhena sesārūpadhamme, rūpadhamme ca pariggahetvā vipassanto.
“变坏”是指身体正在发生改变。“干枯”是指全面干枯。像什么呢?意思是:就像把尸利沙花等花放在被阳光晒热的尘土里一样。“不雅”是指不可意、令人厌恶的。“被称为雅”是指被愚人们称作“雅”的。“不见雅相”是指没有如实见到、没有真正看清,却称赞为“雅”。“可厌”是指“让这可厌”,由于与dhi这个词结合,各处都用受格,意思是“让这腐臭之身被厌弃吧”。“恶臭”是指有恶臭的、带有恶臭的。在如前所说的腐臭之身中,因贪欲而放逸的众生,陷入了放逸。他们舍弃了通往善趣之道:就是舍弃通往善趣之道,连戒都舍弃了,更不用说禅那等,这是其意旨。只有“阿拉汉”才能用来称呼声闻漏尽者,其他人则是独觉佛、正自觉者,所以连同限定语一起说为“阿拉汉等”。“一切不安的止息”是指一切烦恼不安的止息。巴利
Ruppatoti vikāraṃ āpādiyamānasarīrassa. Parisussatīti samantato sussati. Yathā kiṃ? Pupphaṃ yathā paṃsuni ātape kataṃ sūriyātapasantatte paṃsuni ṭhapitaṃ sirīsādipupphaṃ viyāti attho. Ajaññanti amanuññaṃ jigucchanīyaṃ. Jaññasaṅkhātanti bālehi ‘‘jañña’’nti evaṃ kittitaṃ. Jaññarūpaṃ apassatoti yathābhūtaṃ appassato aviddasuno ‘‘jañña’’nti pasaṃsitaṃ. Dhiratthumanti dhi atthu imaṃ, dhi-saddayogena sabbattha upayogavacanaṃ, imassa pūtikāyassa dhikāro hotūti attho. Duggandhiyanti duggandhikaṃ duggandhavantaṃ. Yattha yathāvutte pūtikāye rāgahetu pamattā pamādaṃ āpannā. Pajāti sattā. Hāpenti maggaṃ sugatūpapattiyāti sugatūpapattiyā maggaṃ, sīlampi hāpenti, pageva jhānādinti adhippāyo. Kevalaṃ ‘‘arahanto’’ti vattabbā sāvakakhīṇāsavā, itare pana paccekabuddhā sammāsambuddhāti saha visesanenāti āha ‘‘arahantādīna’’nti. Sabbadarathappaṭippassaddhiyāti sabbakilesadarathappaṭippassaddhiyā.
第二戒五法的注释巴利
Dutiyasīlapañcakavaṇṇanā
“杀生等”中的“等”字,应当理解为涵盖了不与取等,直到以最上道所断的烦恼为终点。“断等”中的“等”字,涵盖了离等四种。有些书里写成“以断之力”,那是写错了。杀生的断除就是戒:也就是以惭、愧、悲、无贪等为首的善心生起,通过它来断除杀生,这个杀生的断除,从戒行的意义上说就是戒。同样,对杀生的远离、戒除也是戒。对杀生的对治思就是思戒。对杀生的防护、关闭进入之门就是防护戒。对杀生的不违犯就是不违犯戒。不与取等也是同样的道理。至于贪欲等,则应当以无贪等来理解其断除。离、思、与彼相应的法、防护、不违犯,以及以彼为首的法。巴利
Pāṇātipātādīnanti ādi-saddena adinnādānādīnaṃ aggamaggavajjhakilesapariyosānānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Pahānādīti ādi-saddena veramaṇiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ. Kesuci potthakesu ‘‘pahānavasenā’’ti likhanti, sā pamādalekhā. Pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ sīlanti hirottappakaruṇālobhādipamukhena yena kusalacittuppādena pāṇātipāto pahīyati, taṃ pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Tathā pāṇātipātā virati veramaṇī sīlaṃ. Pāṇātipātassa paṭipakkhacetanā cetanā sīlaṃ. Pāṇātipātassa saṃvaraṇaṃ pavesadvārapidhānaṃ saṃvaro sīlaṃ. Pāṇātipātassa avītikkamanaṃ avītikkamo sīlaṃ. Adinnādānassātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Abhijjhādīnaṃ pana anabhijjhādivasena pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Veramaṇī cetanā taṃsampayuttā saṃvarāvītikkamā tappamukhā dhammā.
像这样,先按十善业道说明了断戒等,现在为了说明有方法的八等至、十八种大观以及圣道,就开始说“以出离”等。其中,“以出离”是指以无贪为主导的善心生起。善法是与欲贪对立的,所以这里称为“出离”。因此说“断欲贪为戒”等。其中,断戒等应按照前面所说的方式理解,这里只说明差别。“以无嗔”就是慈。“以光明想”就是让相变得明显而作意,生起光明之想。“以不散乱”就是定。“以法决定”就是如实抉择善等诸法;也有人说是以有缘的名色决定。巴利
Evaṃ dasakusalakammapathavasena pahānasīlādīni dassetvā idāni saupāyānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ, aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvipassanānaṃ, ariyamaggānañca vasena tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘nekkhammenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nekkhammenāti alobhappadhānena kusalacittuppādena. Kusalā hi dhammā kāmapaṭipakkhā idha ‘‘nekkhamma’’nti adhippetā. Tenāha ‘‘kāmacchandassa pahānaṃ sīla’’ntiādi. Tattha pahānasīlādīni heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Visesameva vakkhāma. Abyāpādenāti mettāya. Ālokasaññāyāti vibhūtaṃ katvā manasikaraṇena upaṭṭhitaālokasañjānanena . Avikkhepenāti samādhinā. Dhammavavatthānenāti kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvanicchayena. Sapaccayanāmarūpavavatthānenātipi vadanti.
像这样,通过断除欲贪等五盖——也就是依照“断除世间的贪欲”等经文所说的——展示了作为证得初禅之方法的前行道,以及舍戒等功德之后,现在为了说明八等至等有方法可循,所以说了“以智”等话。因为,去除了作为把握名色和超越疑惑之障碍的愚痴,安住在知遍知的状态中,无常想等就能成就。同样,在禅那等至中,以欢喜为相所带来的喜悦,由于排除了不喜,就能证得禅那等。因此,这里说的“以智破除无明,以喜悦排除不喜”,就是指在等至和观修中排除不喜、破除无明等的方法。不过,逆序的说明应当理解为:是为了显示无明虽然属于盖的性质,也被包含在下面的诸盖之中。巴利
Evaṃ kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānena ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 538) vuttāya paṭhamajjhānādhigamassa upāyabhūtāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya vasena pahānasīlādīni dassetvā idāni saupāyānaṃ aṭṭhasamāpattiādīnaṃ vasena dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nāmarūpapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇānaṃ hi vibandhabhūtassa mohassa dūrīkaraṇena ñātapariññāya ṭhitassa aniccasaññādayo sijjhanti. Tathā jhānasamāpattīsu abhiratinimittena pāmojjena. Tattha anabhiratiyā vinoditāya jhānādīnaṃ samadhigamoti samāpattivipassanānaṃ arativinodanaavijjāpadālanādinā upāyoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ñāṇena avijjāya, pāmojjena aratiyā’’ti. Uppaṭipāṭiniddeso pana nīvaraṇasabhāvāya avijjāya heṭṭhānīvaraṇesupi saṅgahadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在“以初禅断除诸盖”等说法里,诸禅那怎么会有戒的性质?又怎么会有离恶的性质?因为,极清净的身业等,是依靠心的专注才使这些禅那生起,不像有限的善法那样靠净化身业等生起,也不像道果之法那样靠断除和止息恶行、邪命而生起。这话没错。在广大法里,严格来说并没有戒的意义,更谈不上离的意义。但要看到,这是从间接意义上说的。那间接意义是什么呢?从广大善法断除对立面的那一刻起,它们就远离了那些对立面;而且这些对立面不会侵入它们的心,这样就叫作防护。在这些禅那里,没有所谓缠缚的意门违犯,所以也叫作无违犯,而思心所则与它们相应。这个道理后面还会讲到。这样说来,关于断除寻等的说法也就站得住脚了。因为严格来说,戒并不是善法的断除者,这里也不是指不善的寻等。虽然初禅近行定时已经断苦,第四禅近行定时已经断乐,但“以第四禅断除苦乐”是就殊胜的断除来说的。至于“以空无边处定”等句中应当说明的内容,会在讲无色定的部分(《清净道论》1.275起)出现。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamenajhānena nīvaraṇāna’’ntiādīsu kathaṃ jhānānaṃ sīlabhāvo, kathaṃ vā tattha viratiyā sambhavo. Suvisuddhakāyakammādikassa hi cittasamādānavasena imāni jhānāni pavattanti, na parittakusalāni viya kāyakammādivisodhanavasena, nāpi maggaphaladhammā viya duccaritadurājīvasamucchedapaṭippassambhanavasenāti? Saccametaṃ. Mahaggatadhammesu nippariyāyena natthi sīlanaṭṭho, kuto viramaṇaṭṭho. Pariyāyena panetaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ko pana so pariyāyo? Yadaggena mahaggatā kusaladhammā paṭipakkhe pajahanti, tadaggena tato oratā. Te ca yathā cittaṃ nārohanti, evaṃ saṃvutā nāma honti. Pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhāto manodvāre vītikkamo natthi etesūti avītikkamāti ca vuccanti, cetanā pana taṃsampayuttāti. Soyamattho parato āgamissati. Evañca katvā vitakkādipahānavacanampi samatthitaṃ hoti. Na hi nippariyāyato sīlaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ pahāyakaṃ yujjati, na cettha akusalavitakkādayo adhippetā. Kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānūpacāreyeva dukkhassa, catutthajjhānūpacāre ca sukhassa pahānaṃ hoti, atisayapahānaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘catutthena jhānena sukhadukkhānaṃ pahāna’’nti. ‘‘Ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ āruppakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 1.275 ādayo) āgamissati.
对无常的观察,或者观察“无常”,就是无常随观。这是执取三地诸法的无常性而生起的毗婆舍那的名称。对常想的断除,是指对“有为法是常、是永恒”这样生起的邪想的断除;应当知道,仅凭“想”这个词,就已经包含了邪见和邪心。这个道理对下面各项也同样适用。厌离随观,是指以厌离诸行的方式生起的随观。对喜的断除,是指对有喜的渴爱的断除。离贪随观,是指以离贪的方式生起的随观。对贪的断除,是指对诸行中贪的断除。寂灭随观,是指对诸行寂灭的随观。或者,诸行确实寂灭,未来不再以再生而生起,这样观察就是寂灭随观。因此说“以寂灭随观而寂灭,不生起”(《无碍解道》1.83)。因为这种随观已经由想要解脱而达到强有力的阶段。以舍遣诸行的方式生起的随观,就是舍遣随观。这是审察之后而安住。对执取的断除,是指以常等的方式执取的断除。以相续、聚集、作用、所缘的方式执取为单一,就是密集想,对治这个密集想。对造作的断除,是指对造作的断除。诸行的状态等发生变化,就是变易。对坚固想的断除,是指对执取为坚固的断除。对相的断除,是指以聚集等密集的方式以及作用分限,执取诸行有形体的相。对愿求的断除,是指对贪等愿求的断除,意思是以渴爱的方式在诸行中倾向、倾注。对执著的断除,是指对我见的断除。以无常、苦等方式遍知三地一切法,就是增上慧法观。对执取精华之执著的断除,是指在无精华之处执取为精华的颠倒的断除。如实智见,就是已达到坚固阶段的无常等随观本身。有些人说,是生灭智;另一些人说,是有缘名色之见。“世间是由自在天等所造”这样的执著,是愚痴执著。有些人说,是断见和常见的执著;另一些人说,“我在过去世是否曾经存在”等这样生起的堕入疑惑,是愚痴执著。在诸行中执取为庇护、栖止之处,就是耽著执著。依据“耽著欢喜、耽著称悦”(《长部》2.67;《中部》1.281、2.337;《相应部》1.172;《大品》7-8)的说法,耽著就是渴爱。另一些人说,那渴爱以在眼等、色等中生起执取的方式转起,就是耽著执著。“如是安住的诸行将被舍遣”这样生起的智,就是省察随观。不省察,就是与省察相违、以痴为首的不善法。因为脱离轮回,所以还灭就是涅槃;在那里,以趣向之义而说的随观所生起的,就是还灭随观,也就是行舍智和随顺智。系缚执著,是指以系缚的方式在诸行中执著。巴利
Aniccassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tebhūmikadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññāyāti ‘‘saṅkhatadhammā niccā sassatā’’ti evaṃ pavattāya micchāsaññāya, saññāggahaṇeneva diṭṭhicittānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito parāsupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbindanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nandiyāti sappītikataṇhāya. Virāgānupassanāyāti virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Rāgassāti saṅkhāresu rāgassa. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā vā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena na uppajjanti, evaṃ anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirodhānupassanāya nirodheti no samudetī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.83). Muñcitukāmatāya hi ayaṃ balappattā. Saṅkhārānaṃ paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā hi ayaṃ . Ādānassāti niccādivasena gahaṇassa. Santatisamūhakiccārammaṇavasena ekattagahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā, tassā ghanasaññāya. Āyūhanassāti abhisaṅkharaṇassa. Saṅkhārānaṃ avatthādivisesāpatti vipariṇāmo. Dhuvasaññāyāti thirabhāvagahaṇassa. Nimittassāti samūhādighanavasena sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ saviggahatāya. Paṇidhiyāti rāgādipaṇidhiyā, taṇhāvasena saṅkhāresu ninnatāyāti attho. Abhinivesassāti attānudiṭṭhiyā. Aniccadukkhādivasena sabbatebhūmakadhammatiraṇā adhipaññādhammavipassanā. Sārādānābhinivesassāti asāresu sāragahaṇavipallāsassa. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ thirabhāvapattā aniccādianupassanāva. Udayabbayañāṇanti keci. Sappaccayanāmarūpadassananti apare. ‘‘Issarakuttādivasena loko samuppanno’’ti abhiniveso sammohābhiniveso. Ucchedasassatābhinivesoti keci. ‘‘Ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’ntiādinayappavattā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20; mahāni. 174) saṃsayāpatti sammohābhinivesoti apare. Saṅkhāresu tāṇaleṇabhāvagahaṇaṃ ālayābhiniveso. ‘‘Ālayaratā ālayasammuditā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7-8) vacanato ālayo taṇhā. Sā eva cakkhādīsu, rūpādīsu ca abhinivisanavasena pavattiyā ālayābhinivesoti apare. ‘‘Evaṃ ṭhitā te saṅkhārā paṭinissajjīyantī’’ti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanā. Appaṭisaṅkhā paṭisaṅkhāya paṭipakkhabhūtā mohappadhānā akusaladhammā. Vaṭṭato vigatattā vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ, tattha ninnabhāvasaṅkhātena anupassanena pavatti vivaṭṭānupassanā, saṅkhārupekkhā ceva anulomañāṇañca. Saññogābhiniveso saṃyujjanavasena saṅkhāresu abhinivisanaṃ.
见道所断是指与邪见俱生的一处,以及断除的一处。“粗的”是依上道所断的烦恼而说。否则,见道所断的烦恼,比第二道所断的还要粗。“随细的”是指微细的,这是依下道所断的烦恼而说。“一切烦恼”是指剩余的一切烦恼。因为初道等已经断除的烦恼,不会再被断除。巴利
Diṭṭhekaṭṭhānanti diṭṭhiyā sahajekaṭṭhānañca pahānekaṭṭhānañca. Oḷārikānanti uparimaggavajjhe kilese upādāya vuttaṃ. Aññathā dassanena pahātabbāpi dutiyamaggavajjhehi oḷārikā. Aṇusahagatānanti aṇubhūtānaṃ, idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggavajjhe upādāya vuttaṃ. Sabbakilesānanti avasiṭṭhasabbakilesānaṃ. Na hi paṭhamamaggādīhi pahīnā kilesā puna pahīyanti.
“为了使心不后悔而转起”等句中,防护是为了不后悔。因为经中说“阿难,诸善戒是为了不后悔”(《增支部》10.1),所以这些善戒是为了心的不后悔而存在。不后悔是为了喜悦。因为经中说“如理作意的人,喜悦生起”(《长部》3.359),所以它们导向喜悦。喜悦是为了喜。因为经中说“喜悦的人,喜生起”(《长部》1.466;3.359;《增支部》3.96;6.10;11.12),所以它们导向喜。喜是为了轻安。因为经中说“内心有喜的人,身体轻安”(《长部》1.466;3.359;《增支部》3.96;6.10;11.12),所以它们导向轻安。轻安是为了乐。因为经中说“身体轻安的人感受乐”(《长部》1.466;3.359;《增支部》3.96;6.10;11.12),所以它们导向悦。这里“为了乐而感受乐”中的“悦”,说的就是“乐”。为了习行,就是为了定的习行。因为当无染的乐成就时,由“有乐的人,心得定”(《长部》1.466;3.359;《增支部》3.96;6.10;11.12)这句话可知,定必然成就。因此,它们导向定的习行,也就是导向定达到熟练和稳固的状态,这就是意思所在。为了修习,就是为了那定本身的增长。为了多修习,就是为了反复地实践。为了庄严,就是通过成就作为那定之庄严的信根等,而导向那定本身的庄严。为了资具,就是通过成就作为定之资粮的不后悔等,而导向那定本身的资具。这里“资具”一词其实是“资粮”的意思。就像“凡出家者所应积集的生活资具”等句中所说,“资粮”也应理解为“缘”。虽然“资具”一词在“戒为车之资具”(《相应部》5.4)等句中取“庄严”之义,在“以七种城池资具而善加装备”(《增支部》7.67)等句中说的是“眷属”之义,但这里因为“庄严”和“眷属”已经分别另说,所以说是“资粮”的意思。为了眷属,就是以作为根本原因,通过成就作为定之眷属的念、精进等殊胜法,而导向眷属的圆满。为了圆满,就是通过令得自在的状态,以及使其成为观的近因,从而成就圆满的状态,因此导向定的圆满。巴利
‘‘Cittassaavippaṭisārāya saṃvattantī’’tiādīsu saṃvaro avippaṭisāratthāya. ‘‘Avippaṭisāratthāni kho, ānanda, kusalāni sīlānī’’ti (a. ni. 10.1) vacanato cetaso avippaṭisāratthāya bhavanti. Avippaṭisāro pāmojjatthāya. ‘‘Yoniso manasi karoto pāmojjaṃ jāyatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.359) vacanato pāmojjāya saṃvattanti. Pāmojjaṃ pītiyā. ‘‘Pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.466; 3.359; a. ni. 3.96; 6.10; 11.12) vacanato pītiyā saṃvattanti. Pīti passaddhatthāya. ‘‘Pītimanassa kāyo passambhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.466; 3.359; a. ni. 3.96; 6.10; 11.12) vacanato passaddhiyā saṃvattanti. Passaddhi sukhatthāya. ‘‘Passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.466; 3.359; a. ni. 3.96; 6.10; 11.12) vacanato somanassāya saṃvattantīti. ‘‘Sukhatthāya sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti cettha somanassaṃ ‘‘sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Āsevanāyāti samādhissa āsevanāya. Nirāmise hi sukhe siddhe ‘‘sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.466; 3.359; a. ni. 3.96; 6.10; 11.12) vacanato samādhi siddhoyeva hoti, tasmā samādhissa āsevanāya paguṇabalavabhāvāya saṃvattantīti attho. Bhāvanāyāti tasseva samādhissa vaḍḍhiyā. Bahulīkammāyāti punappunaṃ kiriyāya. Alaṅkārāyāti tasseva samādhissa pasādhanabhūtasaddhindriyādinipphattiyā alaṅkārāya saṃvattanti. Parikkhārāyāti avippaṭisārādikassa samādhisambhārassa siddhiyā tasseva samādhissa parikkhārāya saṃvattanti. Sambhārattho hi idha parikkhāra-saddo. ‘‘Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.191) viya sambhāroti ca paccayo veditabbo. Kāmañcāyaṃ parikkhāra-saddo ‘‘ratho sīlaparikkhāro’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.4) alaṅkārattho. ‘‘Sattahi nagaraparikkhārehi suparikkhattaṃ hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.67) parivārattho vutto. Idha pana alaṅkāraparivārānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā ‘‘sambhārattho’’ti vuttaṃ . Parivārāyāti mūlakāraṇabhāveneva samādhissa parivārabhūtasativīriyādidhammavisesasādhanena parivārasampattiyā saṃvattanti. Pāripūriyāti vasībhāvasampāpanena, vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhāvāpādanena ca paripuṇṇabhāvasādhanato samādhissa pāripūriyā saṃvattanti.
像这样,先说明了以极为清净的戒为根本、一切方面都圆满的定之后,现在为了说明以戒为根本、以定为直接基础的种种利益,依据“入定的人如实了知、如实照见;如实了知、如实照见的人心生厌离;厌离的人离贪;由于离贪而解脱”这一教导,说出了“纯一厌离”等话。因为一旦显示出厌离,作为它直接基础的如实知见也就已经显示出来了;如果没有如实知见,厌离就无法成就。厌离等的含义,前面已经分别解释过了。而这里所说的“如实知见”,指的是看见有因缘条件的名色法。应当知道,这样一来,就在这里显示出了戒的利益,最终以不死的大涅槃为归宿。巴利
Evaṃ suparisuddhasīlamūlakaṃ sabbākāraparipūraṃ samādhiṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘samāhito pajānāti passati, yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃ passaṃ nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati , virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 10.2; sa. ni. 3.14) vacanato sīlamūlakāni samādhipadaṭṭhānāni payojanāni dassetuṃ ‘‘ekantanibbidāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nibbidāya hi dassitāya tassā padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ dassitameva hoti, tasmiṃ asati nibbidāya asijjhanato. Nibbidādayo atthato vibhattā eva. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti panettha sappaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Evamettha amatamahānibbānapariyosānaṃ sīlassa payojanaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明戒在舍断等方面的意义,开始讲“在此”等话。其中,舍断就是不再生起的灭,就它这种状态的成立来说,才说“并没有所谓‘舍断’这一法”。不过,它作为法的状态如何成立,前面已经解释过了。这样,它作为戒的状态才完全说得通。所谓“彼彼舍断”,就是像“杀生的舍断、不与取的舍断”这样所说的那种种舍断。所谓“彼彼善法”,就是杀生的舍断属于慈等善法,不与取的舍断属于舍等善法,这样就是彼彼善法。“以安立处之义”,就是以安立处的状态。因为舍断在它存在时才存在,不存在时就不存在,所以它才配得上称为“安立处”。因此,在某个相续中,杀生等是使它动摇的原因,而舍断它、使不动摇,就称为安定。其余的舍断也应这样理解。安定就是安立、安置,或者约束。其余四法,也就是离等四法,并不像舍断那样只是假名,这是这里的意旨。“从此从此”,就是从这种种杀生等。“彼彼”,就是依防护彼彼杀生等,或者依彼彼防护。“依与那两者相应的思”,就是依与离、与防护法相应的思。“彼彼不违犯者”,是就不违犯彼彼杀生等的个人,或者就法聚而言,依据心的生起存在而说的。因此,即使在一刹那中,这些法也可以获得,这是意旨。巴利
Idāni pahānādīsu sīlatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha pajahanaṃ anuppādanirodho pahānanti tassa bhāvasādhanataṃ sandhāya ‘‘pahānanti koci dhammo nāma natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā panassa dhammabhāvo sambhavati, tathā heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitameva. Evaṃ hissa sīlabhāvo suṭṭhu yujjati. Taṃ taṃ pahānanti ‘‘pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ, adinnādānassa pahāna’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ taṃ taṃ pahānaṃ. Tassa tassa kusaladhammassāti pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ mettādikusaladhammassa, adinnādānassa pahānaṃ cāgādikusaladhammassāti evaṃ tassa tassa kusaladhammassa. Patiṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti patiṭṭhānabhāvena. Pahānaṃ hi tasmiṃ sati hoti, asati na hoti, tassa ‘‘patiṭṭhāna’’nti vattabbataṃ labhatīti katvā yasmiṃ santāne pāṇātipātādayo tassa pakampahetavoti tappahānaṃ vikampābhāvakaraṇena ca samādhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesapahānesupi vattabbaṃ. Samādhānaṃ saṇṭhapanaṃ, saṃyamanaṃ vā. Itare cattāroti veramaṇiādayo cattāro dhammā na pahānaṃ viya vohāramattanti adhippāyo. Tato tatoti tamhā tamhā pāṇātipātādito. Tassa tassāti pāṇātipātādikassa saṃvaraṇavasena, tassa tassa vā saṃvarassa vasena. Tadubhayasampayuttacetanāvasenāti veramaṇīhi, saṃvaradhammehi ca sampayuttāya cetanāya vasena. Taṃ taṃ avītikkamantassāti taṃ taṃ pāṇātipātādiṃ avītikkamantassa puggalassa, dhammasamūhassa vā vasena cetaso pavattisabbhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Tasmā ekakkhaṇepi labbhantīti adhippāyo.
戒的杂染与清净的注释巴利
Sīlasaṃkilesavodānavaṇṇanā
21 因为被它染污,所以叫“杂染”。那又是什么呢?回答说:戒的破损等状态,就是戒的杂染。因为靠它变得洁净、清净,所以叫“清净”,也就是不破损等状态。“利养、名誉等”里的“等”字,包括了亲属、肢体、生命等。在七种犯聚中,无论说最初、最后还是中间,这都是按照诵出等经典文句来说的,因为犯聚本身并没有别的什么固定次序。“破损”是指具有破损,或者已被割破。“穿洞”在这里也是同样的道理。就像边缘被割断的衣服一样,是指布的边缘或衣边被割断的衣服。巴利
21. Saṃkilissati tenāti saṃkileso. Ko pana soti āha ‘‘khaṇḍādibhāvo sīlassa saṃkileso’’ti. Vodāyati visujjhati etenāti vodānaṃ, akhaṇḍādibhāvo. Lābhayasādīti ādi-saddena ñātiaṅgajīvitādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā vemajjheti ca idaṃ tesaṃ uddesādipāḷivasena vuttaṃ. Na hi añño koci āpattikkhandhānaṃ anukkamo atthi. Khaṇḍanti khaṇḍavantaṃ, khaṇḍitaṃ vā. Chiddanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya.
“如此”是指现在所说的这种方式。“以淫欲结合故”:因为贪欲缠缚,而达到与淫欲法相似的状态,所以称为淫欲;那是束缚。以淫欲而结合,就是淫欲结合。但在这里,是像淫欲结合那样,所以称淫欲结合,是就它的作用来说。“此处”指这个世间。“某一”就是某一个。“或沙门或婆罗门”:仅因出家而称沙门,或仅因出身而称婆罗门。“双双等至”:应当两者两者地成就,也就是淫欲的意思。“然而确实不成就”是连接语。按摩、揉捏、捶打、按压。“接受”就是容忍。“贪著彼”就是对按摩等感到欢喜。“渴望”就是想要。“满足”就是喜悦。“此亦是”中,“此”是把前面所说的接受等,按破碎等状态合为一类来说;“pi”是结合下文的总括义,“kho”是决定义。这里说的是:这个自称梵行者的人,即使没有双双等至,可是接受女人的按摩、沐浴、捶打等,这也一定会使他的梵行成为破碎、穿孔、有斑点、杂色,因为会导致破碎等状态。这样一来,由于破碎等状态,他行的是不清净的梵行,不是清净的;他与淫欲结合相连,不是脱离。因此,他不能从生等中解脱。为了显示这一点,所以说“这被称为”等。巴利
Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena. Methunasaṃyogavasenāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisabhāvāpattiyā mithunānaṃ idanti methunaṃ, nibandhanaṃ. Methunavasena samāyogo methunasaṃyogo. Idha pana methunasaṃyogo viyāti methunasaṃyogo, tassa vasena. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Ekaccoti eko. Samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vāti pabbajjāmattena samaṇo vā jātimattena brāhmaṇo vā. Dvayaṃdvayasamāpattinti dvīhi dvīhi samāpajjitabbaṃ, methunanti attho. Na heva kho samāpajjatīti sambandho. Ucchādanaṃ ubbattanaṃ. Sambāhanaṃ parimaddanaṃ. Sādiyatīti adhivāseti. Tadassādetīti taṃ ucchādanādiṃ abhiramati. Nikāmetīti icchati. Vittinti tuṭṭhiṃ. Idampi khoti ettha idanti yathāvuttaṃ sādiyanādiṃ khaṇḍabhāvādivasena ekaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Pi-saddo vakkhamānaṃ upādāya samuccayattho. Kho-saddo avadhāraṇattho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadetaṃ brahmacārīpaṭiññassa asatipi dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiyaṃ mātugāmassa ucchādananhāpanasambāhanasādiyanādi, idampi ekaṃsena tassa brahmacariyassa khaṇḍādibhāvāpādanato khaṇḍampi chiddampi sabalampi kammāsampīti. Evaṃ pana khaṇḍādibhāvāpattiyā so aparisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carati, na parisuddhaṃ, saṃyutto methunasaṃyogena, na visaṃyutto. Tato cassa na jātiādīhi parimuttīti dassento ‘‘ayaṃ vuccatī’’tiādimāha.
一起笑,就是带着烦恼纵声大笑。一起玩,就是通过身体接触来嬉戏。一起戏弄,就是尽情地戏弄女人而生活。以眼,就是用自己的眼睛。眼,就是女人的眼睛。注视,就是凑近去凝视、观看。墙外,就是墙的另一边;栅外也是这样。泥做的壁叫墙,砖做的叫栅,这是通常的说法。或者,不管什么样的壁,从人高到一肘半那么高的叫墙,超过这个高度的就叫栅。巴利
Sañjagghatīti kilesavasena mahāhasitaṃ hasati. Saṃkīḷatīti kāyasaṃsaggavasena kīḷati. Saṃkelāyatīti sabbaso mātugāmaṃ kelāyanto viharati. Cakkhunāti attano cakkhunā. Cakkhunti mātugāmassa cakkhuṃ. Upanijjhāyatīti upecca nijjhāyati oloketi. Tirokuṭṭāti kuṭṭassa parato. Tathā tiropākārā. Mattikāmayā bhitti kuṭṭaṃ, iṭṭhakāmayā pākāroti vadanti. Yā kāci vā bhitti porisato diyaḍḍharatanuccappamāṇā kuṭṭaṃ, kuṭṭato adhiko pākāro.
“他的”是指自称梵行者的。“以前”是指在受持誓愿之前。“以欲乐”是指以欲乐的部分。“完全投入”是指彻底投入、结合在一起。“具足”是指具备。“享受”是指嬉戏,或者被侍奉。“愿望”是指希求。关于“以戒”等:通过受持禁制与劝制等为戒,以不违犯为誓愿,二者都是戒。以苦行方式而行持的称为誓愿。或者,从不应作之事而言,回避的相是戒;从各自受持而言,特定的服饰、食事、义务等特殊行持是誓愿。一切苦行即是苦行,离淫欲即是梵行。巴利
Assāti brahmacārīpaṭiññassa. Pubbeti vatasamādānato pubbe. Kāmaguṇehīti kāmakoṭṭhāsehi. Samappitanti suṭṭhu appitaṃ sahitaṃ. Samaṅgībhūtanti samannāgataṃ. Paricārayamānanti kīḷantaṃ, upaṭṭhahiyamānaṃ vā. Paṇidhāyāti patthetvā. Sīlenātiādīsu yamaniyamādisamādānavasena sīlaṃ. Avītikkamavasena vataṃ. Ubhayampi sīlaṃ. Dukkaracariyavasena pavattitaṃ vataṃ. Taṃtaṃakiccasammatato vā nivattilakkhaṇaṃ sīlaṃ. Taṃtaṃsamādānavato vesabhojanakiccakaraṇādivisesapaṭipatti vataṃ. Sabbathāpi dukkaracariyā tapo. Methunavirati brahmacariyaṃ.
“一切”是指毫无剩余,或者指所有。“以不破坏”是指不违犯。通过不违犯,以及未生起的恶法不再生起、善法得以生起,就包含在内了,这是句子的连接方式。其中,愤怒的特相是恼怒;怨恨的特相是怀恨不舍;抹恩的特相是抹杀他人的功德;攀比的特相是抓住对立不放;嫉妒的特相是见他人得利而心生妒恼;悭吝的特相是隐藏自己的所得;谄曲的特相是掩盖自己的过失;诳骗的特相是假装拥有并不存在的功德;僵直的特相是心僵硬;争胜的特相是好斗逞强;傲慢的特相是抬高自己;过慢的特相是极度抬高自己;陶醉的特相是沉醉;放逸的特相是心散乱放纵。用“等”这个字,把贪、痴、颠倒作意等也都包括进来了。巴利
Sabbasoti anavasesato, sabbesaṃ vā. Abhedenāti avītikkamena. Aparāya ca pāpadhammānaṃ anuppattiyā, guṇānaṃ uppattiyā saṅgahitoti yojanā. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho. Upanandhanalakkhaṇo upanāho. Paresaṃ guṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo makkho. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso. Parasampattiusūyanalakkhaṇā issā. Attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ macchariyaṃ. Santadosapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā. Asantaguṇasambhāvanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Cittassa thaddhabhāvalakkhaṇo thambho. Karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho. Unnatilakkhaṇo māno. Abbhunnatilakkhaṇo atimāno. Majjanalakkhaṇo mado. Cittavosaggalakkhaṇo pamādo. Ādi-saddena lobhamohaviparītamanasikārādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
现在,为了让“然而不破碎等状态”等前面已经说过的内容更加清楚明白,所以说了“哪些呢”等话。其中,“未被伤害”就是没有被侵扰。由于是消散的依止,通过从渴爱的奴役中解脱出来,而成就自在的状态。因为不是愚者所能衡量的,所以说“被智者所称赞”。或者,这些的作用是导向定,或者致力于导向定,所以叫“导向定的”。就像因为有根本而有谷物的丰收一样,通过去除对立面而有戒的具足,而在那里见到了过失,所以说“以见戒坏失的过患”。由于如理审虑而行的人重视作用,只见到功德就正确行道,所以说“以见戒具足的功德”。巴利
Idāni ‘‘akhaṇḍādibhāvo panā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yāni hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha anupahatānīti anupaddutāni. Vivaṭṭūpanissayatāya taṇhādāsabyato mocanena bhujissabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Aviññūnaṃ appamāṇattā vuttaṃ ‘‘viññūhi pasatthattā’’ti. Samādhisaṃvattanaṃ vā etesaṃ payojanaṃ, samādhisaṃvattane vā niyuttānīti samādhisaṃvattanikāni. Niddānena sassasampatti viya paṭipakkhavigamena sīlasampadā, sā ca tattha sati dosadassaneti āha ‘‘sīlavipattiyā ca ādīnavadassanenā’’ti. Nisammakārīnaṃ payojanagarukatāya diṭṭhaguṇeyeva sammāpaṭipattīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlasampattiyā ca ānisaṃsadassanenā’’ti.
在这里,戒坏失的过患,要从之前所说戒具足功德的相反面来理解。因为这一点很容易明白,所以不再展开,而是用其他方式来说明,于是开始说“再者”等。其中,就像戒具足是让众生受人喜爱的原因,同样,戒坏失是让人不受喜爱的原因,所以说“破戒者……为天人所……”。他不该被教导,因为让人厌恶。“苦者”:已经生起了苦。“后悔者”:因为“我确实没有做善事”等而追悔。“丑色者”:缺少功德的光彩和身体的好相貌。“他的”:指破戒者的。“苦触”:带来苦的触,属于他的。因为没有功德的威力,所以价值很小,因此是“价值小”,就像多年积存的粪坑、尿坑一样。“难净化”:无法净化。“尸火把”:在焚尸火中烧过之后抽出来的火把。“两边外”:从沙门身份和在家人享受这两边都退失了。“一切敌”:是一切人的敌人,或者一切人都是他的敌人,所以是一切敌者,就是那个人。“不应共住”:不应与他共住。“于正法”:于行道正法和证悟正法。巴利
Tattha sīlavipattiyā ādīnavo sīlasampadāya heṭṭhā dassitaānisaṃsapaṭipakkhato veditabbo, taṃ suviññeyyanti avitthāretvā pakārantarehi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’ti āraddhaṃ. Tattha yathā sīlasampadā sattānaṃ manuññabhāvakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ sīlavipatti amanuññabhāvakāraṇanti āha ‘‘dussīlo…pe… devamanussāna’’nti. Ananusāsanīyo jigucchitabbato. Dukkhitoti sañjātadukkho. Vippaṭisārīti ‘‘akataṃ vata me kalyāṇa’’ntiādinā paccānutāpī. Dubbaṇṇoti guṇavaṇṇena, kāyavaṇṇena ca virahito. Assāti dussīlassa. Samphassitānaṃ dukkho dukkhāvaho samphasso etassāti dukkhasamphasso. Guṇānubhāvābhāvato appaṃ agghatīti appaggho. Anekavassagaṇikagūthakūpo viyāti anekavassasamūhe sañcitukkārāvāṭo viya. Dubbisodhano sodhetuṃ asakkuṇeyyo. Chavālātaṃ chavaḍāhe santajjanummukkaṃ. Ubhato paribāhiroti sāmaññato, gihibhogato ca parihīno. Sabbesaṃ verī, sabbe vā verī etassāti sabbaverī, so eva sabbaveriko, puriso. Saṃvāsaṃ nārahatīti asaṃvāsāraho. Saddhammeti paṭipattisaddhamme, paṭivedhasaddhamme ca.
为了详细说明“在火聚譬喻里所说的与苦有分”这个简要说出的含义,开头说了“对于破戒者……”等话。对于享受五种欲乐,以及别人给予的礼敬、尊重等快乐,以爱味之心被束缚、执著于五种欲……以爱味之心被束缚,这些人的。他们那些如前所说的对快乐的味著是它的缘,所以叫“以它为缘”。和“苦”连接起来。巴利
‘‘Aggikkhandhapariyāye vuttadukkhabhāgitāyā’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘dussīlānañhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Pañcakāmaguṇaparibhogasukhe, parehi kayiramānavandanamānanādisukhe ca assādena gadhitacittā pañcakāma…pe… gadhitacittā, tesaṃ. Te yathāvuttasukhassādā paccayā etassāti tappaccayaṃ. Dukkhanti sambandho.
你们看哪,确实要看,好好看。大的,就是广大。火聚,就是一大堆火。燃烧的,就是烧得炽烈。全面燃烧的,就是从四面八方都在烧,火星四溅。成为一团光焰的,就是带着光,从各处升起的火焰汇成一片光明。你们对此怎么想?就是问:对我现在所说的这个意思,你们怎么想?这是为了取得你们的认同而问。拥抱,就是抱住。靠近坐下,就是用那个拥抱的姿势凑过去坐下。导师在这里引出拥抱火聚和拥抱少女,是为了说明什么用意,所以说了“我令知”等语。其中,我令知就是我告知。你们,就是你们。我令觉知,就是我令觉悟。破戒者的,就是无戒者的、远离戒者的。恶法者的,就是因为破戒而志意下劣、本性卑劣。不净可疑行为者的,就是由于身行为等不清净而不净,成为可被疑念、可被忆念其行为的。因为破戒者只要看到某种不相称的事,就会想“这必定是某某做的”,而成为可被他人猜疑的;或者看到比丘们商量某种应作之事时,就会想“这些人莫非是知道了我做的事才商量的吧”,于是自己的行为就成为可被疑念、可被忆念的。覆藏行为者的,就是因为应羞耻而应覆藏其行为的。非沙门者的,就是不是沙门的。在取筹等事中,以“我也是沙门”的邪妄自称而自称沙门的。非梵行者的,因为非梵行。在布萨等事中,以“我也是梵行者”的邪妄自称而自称梵行者的。腐臭者的,因为被腐臭之业即戒败所入于内,故内腐臭。漏泄者的,因为通过六门被贪等烦恼所淋灌,故湿润。杂秽生者的,因为生起贪等垢秽,又因为应被具戒者舍弃。以火聚为譬喻,即成为卑劣譬喻之义。因此世尊说:“这对他才是好的。”世尊显示苦之后,显示苦,这是关联。巴利
Passatha noti passatha nu, api passatha. Mahantanti vipulaṃ. Aggikkhandhanti aggisamūhaṃ. Ādittanti padittaṃ. Sampajjalitanti samantato pajjalitaṃ acchivipphuliṅgāni muccantaṃ. Sajotibhūtanti sapabhaṃ samantato uṭṭhitāhi jālāhi ekappabhāsamudayabhūtaṃ. Taṃ kiṃ maññathāti taṃ idāni mayā vuccamānamatthaṃ kiṃ maññathāti anumatigahaṇatthaṃ pucchati. Āliṅgetvāti upagūhitvā. Upanisīdeyyāti teneva āliṅganena upecca nisīdeyya. Yadatthamettha satthā aggikkhandhāliṅganaṃ, kaññāliṅganañca ānesi, tamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ārocayāmī’’tiādimāha . Tattha ārocayāmīti āmantemi. Voti tumhe. Paṭivedayāmīti pabodhemi. Dussīlassāti nissīlassa sīlavirahitassa. Pāpadhammassāti dussīlattā eva hīnajjhāsayatāya lāmakasabhāvassa. Asucisaṅkassarasamācārassāti aparisuddhakāyasamācārāditāya asucissa hutvā saṅkāya saritabbasamācārassa. Dussīlo hi kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘‘idaṃ asukena kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti paresaṃ āsaṅkanīyova hoti, kenacideva vā karaṇīyena mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘‘kacci nu kho ime mayā kataṃ kammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’’ti attanoyeva saṅkāya saritabbasamācāroti. Paṭicchannakammantassāti lajjitabbatāya paṭicchādetabbakammantassa. Assamaṇassāti na samaṇassa. Salākaggahaṇādīsu ‘‘ahampi samaṇo’’ti micchāpaṭiññāya samaṇapaṭiññassa. Aseṭṭhacāritāya abrahmacārissa. Uposathādīsu ‘‘ahampi brahmacārī’’ti micchāpaṭiññāya brahmacāripaṭiññassa. Pūtinā kammena sīlavipattiyā anto anupaviṭṭhattā antopūtikassa. Chahi dvārehi rāgādikilesānuvassanena tintattā avassutassa. Sañjātarāgādikacavarattā, sīlavantehi chaḍḍetabbattā ca kasambujātassa. Aggikkhandhūpamāya hīnūpamabhūtāyāti attho. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘etadeva tassa vara’’nti. Bhagavā dukkhaṃ dassetvā dukkhaṃ dassetīti sambandho.
“以猛兽皮绳”就是用猛兽皮做成的绳子,因为这种绳子更粗糙。“摩擦”就是以破坏的方式摩擦。“以油清洗过的”就是用油磨利的。“朝向胸口”就是对着胸口,意思是胸口正中央。“以铁钳”就是用钳子。“令起泡沫”就是让泡沫生起来,意思是反复多次让泡沫生起。巴利
Vāḷarajjuyāti vāḷehi katarajjuyā. Sā hi kharatarā hoti. Ghaṃseyyāti padhaṃsanavasena ghaṃseyya. Teladhotāyāti telena nisitāya. Paccorasminti patiurasmiṃ urābhimukhaṃ, uramajjheti adhippāyo. Ayosaṅkunāti saṇḍāsena. Pheṇuddehakanti pheṇaṃ uddehetvā, anekavāraṃ pheṇaṃ uṭṭhapetvāti attho.
比拥抱火团还要痛苦,因为痛苦极其剧烈,所以果报是苦的、辛辣的,因此称为“比拥抱火团之苦更剧、苦而辛辣的果报”。对于不舍弃欲乐而毁坏戒律的破戒者,他哪里会有乐?根本没有——这就是这段话的意思。“在执取时”就是在执取的时候。“礼敬合掌的执取”就是指合掌礼敬的执取。“对于无戒者”就是对于破戒者。“被损害的”就是因戒的败坏而受损害。“被破坏的”就是因善根被掘取而遭破坏,或者说身上的功德被掘取,这就是其意旨。“从一切怖畏”就是从自我谴责等一切怖畏。“从一切证得之乐”就是包括近行定在内的所有证得之乐。巴利
Aggikkhandhāliṅganadukkhatopi adhimattadukkhatāya kaṭukabhūtaṃ dukkhaṃ phalaṃ etassāti aggikkhandhāliṅganadukkhādhikadukkhakaṭukaphalaṃ. Kāmasukhaṃ avijahato bhinnasīlassa dussīlassa kuto tassa sukhaṃ natthevāti adhippāyo. Sādaneti sādiyane. Yanti añjalikammasādanaṃ. Asīlinoti dussīlassa. Upahatanti sīlabyasanena upaddutaṃ. Khatanti kusalamūlānaṃ khaṇanena khataṃ, khaṇitaṃ vā guṇaṃ sarīreti adhippāyo. Sabbabhayehīti attānuvādādisabbabhayehi. Upacārajjhānaṃ upādāya sabbehi adhigamasukhehi.
与前面所说的情形相反,是指从戒的败坏中所说的方式的相反面,也就是“为天与人所喜爱”等说法开始。持戒比丘的身体香气也能带来喜悦,甚至能令天人也如此。在这里,“甚至能令天人也”应当展开“长期修行的仙人们的气味”等偈颂(《本生经》2.17.55等)来说明。“无恼害”就是没有障碍。杀害、束缚等种种恼害,是现世的烦恼和灾祸。来世种种痛苦的根源,就是戒的毁坏。“超越极限”就是彻底超越,“究竟寂静”就是因没有所谓烦恼热恼的躁动而永远寂静。“惊惧之后”就是以智慧的怖畏而惊惧之后。“应令清净”就是应当使之净化。巴利
Vuttappakāraviparītatoti sīlavipattiyaṃ vuttākārapaṭipakkhato ‘‘manāpo hoti devamanussāna’’ntiādinā. Kāyagandhopi pāmojjaṃ, sīlavantassa bhikkhuno. Karoti api devānanti ettha ‘‘gandho isīnaṃ ciradikkhitāna’’ntiādikā (jā. 2.17.55) gāthā vitthāretabbā. Avighātīti appaṭighātī. Vadhabandhādiparikilesā diṭṭhadhammikā āsavā upaddavā. Samparāyikadukkhānaṃ mūlaṃ nāma dussīlyaṃ. Antamatikkantaṃ accantaṃ, accantaṃ santā accantasantā kilesapariḷāhasaṅkhātadarathānaṃ abhāvena sabbadā santā. Ubbijjitvāti ñāṇutrāsena uttasitvā. Vodāpetabbanti visodhetabbaṃ.